Mark 5:13 — Word Study
N1904καὶ ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς εὐθέως ὁ Ἰησοῦς. καὶ ἐξελθόντα τὰ πνεύματα τὰ ἀκάθαρτα εἰσῆλθον εἰς τοὺς χοίρους, καὶ ὥρμησεν ἡ ἀγέλη κατὰ τοῦ κρημνοῦ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν ἦσαν δὲ ὡς δισχίλιοι καὶ ἐπνίγοντο ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ.
BSAAndkai He allowedepitrepō▸ [allowed them to proceed] themautos immediatelyeutheōs <the>ho Jesus.Iēsous Andkai having gone outexerchomai▸ theho spiritspneuma <the>ho uncleanakathartos [impure, morally defiled] enteredeiserchomai▸ intoeis theho pigs,choiros [swine, unclean animals] andkai rushedhormaō▸ theho herdagelē [a large group of animals] downkata theho steep bankkrēmnos [sharp, precipitous] intoeis theho seathalassa [a large body of water] wereeimi▸ nowde abouthōs two thousanddischilioi△ [approximately 2000] andkai they were drownedpnigō▸ [were choked, perished] inen theho sea.thalassa [the sea]
| Greek | English | Parsing |
|---|---|---|
| καὶ | And | Conjunction |
| ἐπέτρεψεν | He allowed | Verb, aorist, active |
| αὐτοῖς | them | Personal pronoun, dative, plural |
| εὐθέως | immediately | Adverb |
| ὁ | <the> | Article, nominative, singular |
| Ἰησοῦς. | Jesus. | Noun, nominative, singular |
| καὶ | And | Conjunction |
| ἐξελθόντα | having gone out | Verb, second aorist, active |
| τὰ | the | Article, nominative, plural |
| πνεύματα | spirits | Noun, nominative, plural |
| τὰ | <the> | Article, nominative, plural |
| ἀκάθαρτα | unclean | Adjective, nominative, plural |
| εἰσῆλθον | entered | Verb, second aorist, active |
| εἰς | into | Preposition |
| τοὺς | the | Article, accusative, plural |
| χοίρους, | pigs, | Noun, accusative, plural |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| ὥρμησεν | rushed | Verb, aorist, active |
| ἡ | the | Article, nominative, singular |
| ἀγέλη | herd | Noun, nominative, singular |
| κατὰ | down | Preposition |
| τοῦ | the | Article, genitive, singular |
| κρημνοῦ | steep bank | Noun, genitive, singular |
| εἰς | into | Preposition |
| τὴν | the | Article, accusative, singular |
| θάλασσαν | sea | Noun, accusative, singular |
| ἦσαν | were | Verb, imperfect, active |
| δὲ | now | Conjunction |
| ὡς | about | Adverb |
| δισχίλιοι | two thousand | Adjective, nominative, plural |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| ἐπνίγοντο | they were drowned | Verb, imperfect, passive |
| ἐν | in | Preposition |
| τῇ | the | Article, dative, singular |
| θαλάσσῃ. | sea. | Noun, dative, singular |
Every word in the verse. Click a row to open it in the panel on the left.
| BSB | He gave them permission, and the unclean spirits came out and went into the pigs, and the herd of about two thousand rushed down the steep bank into the sea and drowned in the water. |
| KJV | And forthwith Jesus gave them leave. And the unclean spirits went out, and entered into the swine: and the herd ran violently down a steep place into the sea, (they were about two thousand;) and were choked in the sea. |
| ASV | And he gave them leave. And the unclean spirits came out, and entered into the swine: and the herd rushed down the steep into the sea, in number about two thousand; and they were drowned in the sea. |
| YLT | and immediately Jesus gave them leave, and having come forth, the unclean spirits did enter into the swine, and the herd did rush down the steep place to the sea — and they were about two thousand — and they were choked in the sea. |
| WEB | At once Jesus gave them permission. The unclean spirits came out and entered into the pigs. The herd of about two thousand rushed down the steep bank into the sea, and they were drowned in the sea. |
| BBE | And he let them do it. And the unclean spirits came out and went into the pigs; and the herd went rushing down a sharp slope into the sea, about two thousand of them; and they came to their death in the sea. |
Where they part company is ἐπέτρεψεν — see How Translations Differ.
The sentence is composed of a main clause followed by several subordinate clauses that describe the actions taken by the spirits and the pigs.
7 commentators on this verse
Gill, Jamieson, Trapp, Ellicott & more — read them ›
clause
subjectὁ
verbἐπιτρέπω
The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
1 of 35 occurs nowhere else in the New Testament — a word chosen on purpose.
Bars are logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.
Deep Study — Mark 5:13
Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.
Context — The Healing of the Demon-Possessed Mangenerated
Mark 5:13 describes a dramatic moment when Jesus confronts a man possessed by a legion of demons. The demons plead with Jesus to allow them to enter a herd of pigs. This passage illustrates Jesus' authority over evil spirits and the consequences of their actions, as the pigs rush into the sea and drown. This event serves as a powerful demonstration of the spiritual battle between good and evil and highlights the transformative power of Jesus in the lives of those afflicted by darkness.
Cross References
| Reference | Text (BSB) | |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | 1 Kings 22:22 | And he replied, ‘I will go out and be a lying spirit in the mouths of all his prophets.’ ‘You will surely entice him and prevail,’ said the LORD. ‘Go and do it.’ |
| 2 | Job 1:12 | “Very well,” said the LORD to Satan. “Everything he has is in your hands, but you must not lay a hand on the man himself.” Then Satan went out from the presence of the LORD. |
| 3 | Job 2:6 | “Very well,” said the LORD to Satan. “He is in your hands, but you must spare his life.” |
| 4 | Matthew 8:32 | “Go!” He told them. So they came out and went into the pigs, and the whole herd rushed down the steep bank into the sea and died in the waters. |
| 5 | 1 Peter 3:22 | who has gone into heaven and is at the right hand of God, with angels, authorities, and powers subject to Him. |
The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 9 references, hung on the phrase they belong to
The Key Word — ἐπέτρεψεν, epitrepōgenerated
The verb ἐπιτρέπω (*epitrepo*) means to allow or permit. It is derived from the prefix ἐπι- (upon) and the root τρέπω (to turn). In this context, it signifies Jesus granting permission to the demons to enter the pigs, showcasing His control over the spiritual realm.
This verb is in the aorist tense, indicating a completed action, and is in the indicative mood, affirming that this event truly occurred. The use of the third person singular indicates that Jesus, as the subject, is the one who allowed the spirits to proceed.
How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated
In this study, the verse is primarily examined in the Berean Standard Bible, which uses the phrase He gave them permission. The KJV and ASV also convey this idea with he gave them leave.
Some translations vary in their rendering of ἐπέτρεψεν. The DBY and FBV use allowed, while the ULB opts for he allowed. This distinction highlights different approaches to conveying the same underlying meaning.
Sentence Structuregenerated
The main verb of the verse is ἐπέτρεψεν, He allowed, which governs the actions that follow. The structure includes several phrases: the indirect object αὐτοῖς (to them), the participial phrase ἐξελθόντα (having gone out), and the subsequent actions of the spirits entering the pigs.
The verse contains multiple clauses, with the primary action being the permission granted by Jesus, followed by the actions of the unclean spirits and the herd of pigs. This complex structure illustrates the sequence of events and the immediate consequences of Jesus' command.
Septuagint Backgroundgenerated
The term ἐπιτρέπω does not have a direct equivalent in the Septuagint but carries a similar sense of permission found in various contexts throughout the Old Testament. Its usage here emphasizes Jesus' authority, akin to God's sovereignty in the Hebrew Scriptures.
The word πνεῦμα (spirit) appears in the Septuagint, often in relation to unclean or evil spirits, reflecting the continuity of this theme from the Old Testament to the New Testament.
In plain words — the whole versegenerated
Mark 5:13 describes how Jesus allowed unclean spirits to enter a herd of pigs. The pigs, about two thousand in number, rushed down a steep bank into the sea and drowned. This event shows Jesus' authority over evil spirits and illustrates the destructive nature of sin.
Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated
Jesus' permission indicates His authority over the spiritual realm, showing that even demons must submit to His will.
The demons sought to inhabit the pigs as a means of expressing their evil nature, leading to the pigs' destruction.
The drowning of the pigs symbolizes the destructive outcome of demonic influence and serves as a warning about the consequences of sin.
This event exemplifies Jesus' power over evil, reinforcing the message that He has authority over all creation, including spiritual forces.
Reflection Questionsgenerated
- In what ways do I see the influence of evil in my life or community?
- How can I recognize and submit to the authority of Jesus in my daily decisions?
- What steps can I take to protect myself from negative influences, similar to the pigs' fate?
- How does understanding Jesus' authority over evil spirits encourage my faith?
The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it
Early church writers referenced this passage to discuss the nature of evil and Jesus' authority over it. Their insights shed light on the implications of the events described in this verse.
The devil’s legion would not have had power over the herd of swine unless they had gotten it from God. Thus they are far from having power over the sheep of God.Early Church Fathers on Mark 5 →
I asked this too, whether Paradise was sufficient in size for all the righteous to live there. I asked about what is not written in Scripture,Early Church Fathers on Mark 5 →
Was it just that two thousand swine perished so one soul might be saved? One seeking purity of heart had best not become preoccupied with the natural prerogative of the demonic legion or animals.Early Church Fathers on Mark 5 →
Commentators on this verse — 7 expositors, verse by verse
Each of these wrote on Mark 5:13 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.
John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire BibleAnd forthwith Jesus gave them leave,.... For the reason of this [See comments on Matthew 8:32].
Read John Gill on Mark 5 →Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's CommentaryAnd forthwith Jesus gave them leave. And the unclean spirits went out, and entered into the swine: and the herd ran violently down a steep place into the sea, (they were about two thousand;) and were choked in the sea.
Read Robert Jamieson on Mark 5 →John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments13 And forthwith Jesus gave them leave. And the unclean spirits went out, and entered into the swine: and the herd ran violently down a steep place into the sea, (they were about two thousand;) and were choked in the sea. Ver. 13. Jesus gave them leave] If Christ condescended to the devils, though to the loss of others, will he not hear us? Into the sea] So that standing pool in Gadaris is called, which, Strabo saith, is of such a foul nature, that if beasts taste of it, they shed their hair, nails, hoofs, or horns.
Read John Trapp on Mark 5 →Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers(13) They were about two thousand.—The number, which is peculiar to St. Mark, may be noted as another instance of his graphic accuracy in detail.
Read Charles John Ellicott on Mark 5 →AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the BibleVerse 13. Gave them leave.] For επετρεψεν, DH, three others, and three copies of the Itala have επεμψεν, sent them.
Read AdamClarke on Mark 5 →CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges13. down a steep place] At Kerza or Gersa, “where there is no precipice running sheer to the sea, but a narrow belt of beach, the bluff behind is so steep, and the shore so narrow, that a herd of swine rushing frantically down, must certainly have been overwhelmed in the sea before they could recover themselves.” Tristram’s Land of Israel p. 462. the sea] This, as we have seen above (Mark 3:7), was one of the names, by which the Lake of Gennesaret was called.
Read Cambridge on Mark 5 →Daniel Denison Whedon1808–1885Whedon's Commentary on the Bible13. Gave them leave — That is, as before said, after dismissing them from the man, he did not hold any control over their course.
Read Daniel Denison Whedon on Mark 5 →The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company
Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.
Modern formal
He gave them permission, and the unclean spirits came out and went into the pigs, and the herd of about two thousand rushed down the steep bank into the sea and drowned in the water.
At once Jesus gave them permission. The unclean spirits came out and entered into the pigs. The herd of about two thousand rushed down the steep bank into the sea, and they were drowned in the sea.
So Jesus immediately gave them permission, and the unclean spirits came out and went into the pigs, and the herd of about two thousand rushed down the steep bank into the sea and drowned in the water.
Jesus gave them permission. So the unclean spirits came out and went into the pigs. Then the herd rushed down the steep slope into the lake, and about two thousand were drowned in the lake.
Tyndale line
And forthwith Jesus gave them leave. And the unclean spirits went out, and entered into the swine: and the herd ran violently down a steep place into the sea, (they were about two thousand;) and were choked in the sea.
And he gave them leave. And the unclean spirits came out, and entered into the swine: and the herd rushed down the steep into the sea, in number about two thousand; and they were drowned in the sea.
And he gave them leave. And the unclean spirits came out, and entered into the swine: and the herd rushed down the steep into the sea, in number about two thousand; and they were choked in the sea.
And forthwith Jesus gave them leave. And the unclean spirits went out, and entered into the swine: and the herd ran violently down a steep place into the sea (they were about two thousand) and were choked in the sea.
And incontinently Iesus gaue them leaue. Then the vncleane spirites went out, and entred into the swine, and the heard ranne headlong from the high banke into the sea, (and there were about two thousand swine) and they were choked vp in the sea.
Strictly literal
And Jesus [immediately] allowed them. And the unclean spirits going out entered into the swine, and the herd rushed down the steep slope, into the sea (about two thousand), and were choked in the sea.
and immediately Jesus gave them leave, and having come forth, the unclean spirits did enter into the swine, and the herd did rush down the steep place to the sea — and they were about two thousand — and they were choked in the sea.
and immediately Jesus gave them leave, and having come forth, the unclean spirits entered into the pigs, and the herd rushed down the steep place to the sea—and they were about two thousand—and they were choked in the sea.
So he allowed them; the unclean spirits came out and entered into the pigs, and they rushed down the steep hill into the sea, and about two thousand pigs drowned in the sea.
From the Latin
And Jesus immediately gave them leave. And the unclean spirits going out, entered into the swine: and the herd with great violence was carried headlong into the sea, being about two thousand, and were stifled in the sea.
Simplified
Jesus allowed them to do this. The evil spirits left the man and went into the pigs. The whole herd, about two thousand, rushed down the steep cliff into the sea and drowned.
And he let them do it. And the unclean spirits came out and went into the pigs; and the herd went rushing down a sharp slope into the sea, about two thousand of them; and they came to their death in the sea.
Word by word, the decisions they made
Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.
The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank
This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.
Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.
The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac
Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.
Et concessit eis statim Jesus. Et exeuntes spiritus immundi introierunt in porcos : et magno impetu grex præcipitatus est in mare ad duo millia, et suffocati sunt in mari.
Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.
ܘܐܦܣ ܠܗܘܢ ܘܢܦܩ ܪܘܚܐ ܗܠܝܢ ܛܢܦܬܐ ܘܥܠ ܒܚܙܝܪܐ ܘܪܗܛܬ ܗܝ ܒܩܪܐ ܠܫܩܝܦܐ ܘܢܦܠܬ ܒܝܡܐ ܐܝܟ ܬܪܝܢ ܐܠܦܝܢ ܘܐܬܚܢܩܘ ܒܡܝܐ
The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.
Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.
The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say
Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.
καὶ ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς — — — καὶ ἐξελθόντα τὰ πνεύματα τὰ ἀκάθαρτα εἰσῆλθον εἰς τοὺς χοίρους, καὶ ὥρμησεν ἡ ἀγέλη κατὰ τοῦ κρημνοῦ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν — — ὡς δισχίλιοι καὶ ἐπνίγοντο ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ.
The standard critical text of the New Testament.
καὶ ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς — — — καὶ ἐξελθόντα τὰ πνεύματα τὰ ἀκάθαρτα εἰσῆλθον εἰς τοὺς χοίρους, καὶ ὥρμησεν ἡ ἀγέλη κατὰ τοῦ κρημνοῦ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν — — ὡς δισχίλιοι καὶ ἐπνίγοντο ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ.
The previous edition, still widely cited.
καὶ ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς — — — καὶ ἐξελθόντα τὰ πνεύματα τὰ ἀκάθαρτα εἰσῆλθον εἰς τοὺς χοίρους, καὶ ὥρμησεν ἡ ἀγέλη κατὰ τοῦ κρημνοῦ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν — — ὡς δισχίλιοι καὶ ἐπνίγοντο ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ.
The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.
καὶ ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς — — — καὶ ἐξελθόντα τὰ πνεύματα τὰ ἀκάθαρτα εἰσῆλθον εἰς τοὺς χοίρους, καὶ ὥρμησεν ἡ ἀγέλη κατὰ τοῦ κρημνοῦ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν — — ὡς δισχίλιοι καὶ ἐπνίγοντο ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ.
The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.
καὶ ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς — — — καὶ ἐξελθόντα τὰ πνεύματα τὰ ἀκάθαρτα εἰσῆλθον εἰς τοὺς χοίρους, καὶ ὥρμησεν ἡ ἀγέλη κατὰ τοῦ κρημνοῦ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν — — ὡς δισχίλιοι καὶ ἐπνίγοντο ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ.
An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.
καὶ ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς — — — καὶ ἐξελθόντα τὰ πνεύματα τὰ ἀκάθαρτα εἰσῆλθον εἰς τοὺς χοίρους, καὶ ὥρμησεν ἡ ἀγέλη κατὰ τοῦ κρημνοῦ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν — — ὡς δισχίλιοι καὶ ἐπνίγοντο ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ.
A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.
καὶ ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς εὐθέως ὁ Ἰησοῦς. καὶ ἐξελθόντα τὰ πνεύματα τὰ ἀκάθαρτα εἰσῆλθον εἰς τοὺς χοίρους, καὶ ὥρμησεν ἡ ἀγέλη κατὰ τοῦ κρημνοῦ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν ἦσαν δὲ ὡς δισχίλιοι καὶ ἐπνίγοντο ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ.
The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.
καὶ ἐπέτρεψεν αὐτοῖς εὐθέως ὁ Ἰησοῦς. καὶ ἐξελθόντα τὰ πνεύματα τὰ ἀκάθαρτα εἰσῆλθον εἰς τοὺς χοίρους, καὶ ὥρμησεν ἡ ἀγέλη κατὰ τοῦ κρημνοῦ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν ἦσαν δὲ ὡς δισχίλιοι καὶ ἐπνίγοντο ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ.
The printed tradition behind the King James Version.
A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.
Word by word, across the editions
| Word | Editions carrying it | Missing from |
|---|---|---|
| εὐθέως immediately | TR, Byz | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn |
| ὁ <the> | TR, Byz | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn |
| Ἰησοῦς. Jesus. | TR, Byz | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn |
| ἦσαν were | TR, Byz | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn |
| δὲ now | TR, Byz | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn |
Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0
The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with
This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.
Lexicons — every word in Mark 5:13
One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.
Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word ἐπιτρέπω (*epitrepo*) is built from the prefix ἐπι- and the root τρέπω, meaning to turn or transfer. It covers a range of meanings including to commit, entrust, permit, or allow. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as allowing someone to act or entrusting matters to others, with references in 1 Corinthians and the Gospels.
ἐπι-τρέπω ; 1 aor. ἐπέτρεψα; Pass., [pres. ἐπιτρέπομαι]; 2 aor. ἐπετράπην; pf. 3 pers. sing. ἐπιτέτραπται (1 Co. xiv. 34 RG); fr. Hom. down; 1. to turn to, transfer, commit, intrust. 2. to permit, allow, give leave: 1 Co. xvi. 7; Heb. vi. 3; τινί, Mk. v.13; Jn. xix. 38; with an inf. added, Mt. viii. 21; xix. 8; Lk. viii. 32; ix. 59, 61; Acts xxi. 89 sq.; 1 Tim. ii. 12; and without the dat. Mk. x. 4; foll. by ace. with inf. Acts xxvii. 3 (where L T Tr WH πορευθέντι) ; cf. Xen. an. 7, 7,8; Plato, legg. 5 p. 730d. Pass. ἐπιτρέπεταί τινι, with inf.: Acts xxvi. 1; XXvill. 16; 1 Co. xiv. 34.
ἐπιτρέπω. For the distinctive NT sense of this verb ‘ permit,” “allow,” cf. P Magd 27(B.c. 221) δέομαι οὖν σου, βασιλεῦ, . ++ μὴ ἐπιτρέπειν Tat Tlodpa κωλύειν ἡμᾶς οἰκοδομεῖν, 7b. 12) (B.C. 217) μὴ ἐπιτρέπειν αὐτοῖς ἐγβαλεῖν pe ἐκ τῶν κλήρων, BGU 11. 4512° (i/ii A.D.) θεῶν ἐπιτρεπόν[τ]ων, Ρ Ryl II. 120% (ap. 167) διὸ ἀξιῶ ἐπιτρέψαι μ[ο]ι χρήσασθαι αὐτῷ τῷ “Eppetvw, P Lond 951 verso* (late ili/A.D.) (=III. p. 213) τ]δ βρέφος ἐχέτω τροφόν, ἐγὼ γὰρ οὐκ ἐπιτίρέϊπω τῇ θυγατρί μου θηλάζειν, and for the pass., P Oxy III. 474 (A.D. 184 ἢ) δεύτερον τοῦτο προσαγορεύω ἄνευ τοῦ ἐπιτραπῆναι μὴ ἐφάπτεσθαι τοῦ κυριακοῦ χρήματος, “1 now make this second order that the imperial moneys are not to be touched without leave” (Edd.). For the use of the inf. after ἐπιτρέπω in the NT, as in the Pontic dialect of MGr, see Proleg. p. 205. For the verb = ‘‘entrust,’’ ‘‘commission,” ‘‘instruct,” we may cite a…
Read the full entry →ἐπιτρέπω (epitrepō) — to permit.
ἐπιτρέπ-ω,
Ionic dialect ἐπιτράπω [ᾰ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]future -τρέψ; Doric dialect 3rd.pers. plural -τρέψοντι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect infinitive -τραψῆν[Refs]: aorist I -έτρεψα[Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist 2 -έτραπον[Refs]: perfect -τέτρᾰφα[Refs 2nd c.BC+] —middle, future -τρέψομαι (variant{-τράψ-}) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 2 -ετρᾰπόμην[Refs 8th c.BC+] —passive, future -τετράψομαι Pisistr. cited in [Refs 3rd c.AD+]: aorist I -ετρέφθην[Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect -ετράφθην, participle -τραφθείς[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 2 -ετράπην [ᾰ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect (see. below [Refs]:—properly to turn to or towards, used by Hom.in aorist 2 middle, σοὶ.. θυμὸς ἐπετράπετο εἴρεσθαι thy mind inclined itself to ask, [Refs 8th…
Read the full entry →ἐπιτρέπω
epitrepo
from 1909 and the base of 5157; to turn over (transfer), i.e.
allow:--give leave (liberty, license), let, permit, suffer.
see GREEK for 1909
see GREEK for 5157
ἐπιτρέπω
v.
I allow, permit
ἐπιτρέπω ionic -τράπω fut. -τρέψω aor1 -έτρεψα ionic -έτραψα aor2 -έτραπον Pass. and Mid., ionic aor1 -ετράφθην Pass. ionic aor1 -ετράφθην aor2 pass. -ετράπην mid. -ετρα^πόμην properly to turn towards, in aor2 mid., θυμὸς ἐπετράπετο εἴρεσθαι thy mind inclined itself to ask, Od.
to turn over to, to commit or entrust to another as trustee, guardian, or vicegerent, Hom., Hdt., attic; c. inf., σοὶ ἐπέτρεψεν πονέεσθαι he left it to you to work, Il.
c. dat. only, to trust to, rely upon, Hom., Hdt.: to refer the matter to a person, leave it to his judgment, Ar., Thuc.:—so in Mid. to entrust oneself, leave one's case to, τινι Hdt.
Pass. to be entrusted, ᾧ λαοί τ᾽ ἐπιτετράφαται (3rd pl. perf. for ἐπιτετραμμένοι εἰσί) Il.; τῇς (sc. Ὥραις) ἐπιτέτραπται οὐρανός heaven's gate is…
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singularaorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
19 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
πολλαῖς γὰρ ψυχαῖς μετανοίᾳ χρῆσθαι βουληθείσαις οὐκ ἐπέτρεψεν ὁ θεός, ἀλλ’ ὥσπερ ὑπὸ παλιρροίας εἰς τοὔμπαλιν ἀνεχώρησαν τρόπον τινὰ τῆς Λὼτ γυναικὸς (Gen.
οὐδὲ γὰρ ἂν ἐπέτρεψεν Ἴσακος ἐπʼ αὐτῷ τῆς γνώμης γενομένης·
λέγω αὐτῷ: Κύριε, ἐπίτρεψόν μοι ὀλίγα ἐπερωτῆσαί σε.
Ἰσιδώρου γενομένων βιβλιοφυλάκων … Λεωνίδου στρατηγήσαντος ὑπομνηματισμὸς καὶ χειρογραφία τοῦ γραμματέως Λεονίδου διʼ ὧν ἐπετράπη παραλαβεῖν τὰ μήπω παραδεδομένα βιβλία ὅποιά ἐστιν κινδύνῳ τῶν αὐθεντῶν βιβλιοφυλάκων
ἀντίγραφον. Φλάυιος Τιτιανὸς Ὀξυρυγχειτῶν τῇ πόλει χαίρειν. ἀποδέχομαι ὑμᾶς τὴν πατρίδα κοσμεῖν προῃρημένους καὶ ἐπιτρέπω κατασκευάζειν τὸ βαλανεῖον ἔκ τε τῶν ἤδη συνειλεγμένων χρημάτων, ὥς φατε, καὶ ἐξ ὧν
Βασσίων τελώνης ἑταιρικοῦ Ἀφροδίτῃ· ἐπιτρέπω σοι ἑταιρεῖν πρὸς μόνην τὴν ἐνεστῶσαν ἡμέραν, ἥτις ἐστὶν ιδ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος η ἔτους
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-DPM — Personal pronoun · dative · plural · masculinedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
P-DPM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος
The Greek word εὐθέως (i.e. *eutheōs*) is an adverb meaning 'immediately' or 'at once.' It is derived from εὐθύς and is used frequently in the New Testament, particularly in the Gospels. Notably, some lexicons indicate that εὐθέως appears in various contexts, while others mention its interchangeability with εὐθύς in certain verses, particularly in Mark.
εὐθέως
adv.
(< εὐθύς),
[in LXX: Jb 5:3 (פִּתְאֹם), Wi 5:12, I Mac 11:12, al. ;]
straightway, at once, directly: Ga 1:16, Ja 1:24, III Jo 14 (cf. Dalman, Words, 28 f.), Re 4:2, and freq. in Mt, Lk, Jo, Ac (in Mk, εὐθύς), q.v.)
εὐθέως, adv., (fr. εὐθύς. straightway, immediately, forthwith: Mt. iv. 20, 22; viii. 3, and often in the histor. bks., esp. Mark’s Gospel [where, however, T Tr WH have substituted εὐθύς in some 35 out of 41 cases]; elsewhere only in Gal. i. 16 ; Jas. i. 24; Rev. iv. 2, (for o8nd, Job ν. 3). shortly, soon: 8 Jn. 14. [From Soph. down. ]
εὐθέως, the more common Hellenistic form for εὐθύς and εὐθύ, is found before both vowels and consonants: cf. Schmid A/éé2cismus ill. p. 126 and Mayser G7. p. 245. The following may serve as exx. of its use—P Par 635+ (B.c. 165) ἠβου[λόμ]ην μὲν εὐθέως καταπλεύσας ὀφθη[ν]αί σοι κατὰ τὸ ἐπιβάλλον, Ῥ Tebt I. 3010 (Β.6. 114) εὐθέως παραλαβὼν Τρύχαμβον, P Ryl II. 229% (A.p. 38) ἐρωτῶ σε ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου εὐθέως μοι πέϊμ͵)ψαι τὰς ἄλλας (ἀρτάβας) Ὑ, 1). 23019 (A.D. 40) μὴ [ο]ὖν ἄλλως ποιή[σ]ῃ(9) μὴ ἵνα δόξωμέν σε εὐθέως ἠλλάχθαι τὰ πρὸς ἡμᾶς, ‘‘do not neglect this, lest we think you to have become all at once estranged towards us” (Edd.), P Fay 119% (c. A.D. 100) εὐθέος πέμσις τὰ κτήνη, ‘‘send the animals at once,’ and BGU II. 4238 (ii/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 91) εὐθέως ὅτε εἰσῆλθον εἰς Μησηγούς, ἔλαβα βιάτικον παρὰ Καίσαρος χρυσοῦς τρεῖς, ““straightway when I entered Misenum, I received my…
Read the full entry →εὐθέως (eutheōs) — immediately.
Included with: εὐθύς, εῖα, ύ,
Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἰθύς (which see: so always in Hom.and [Refs 5th c.BC+],
__A straight, direct, whether vertically or horizontally, opposed to σκολιός, καμπύλος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ τὸ εὐθὺ ἑστάναι stands still with reference to the vertical, of a spinning top, [Refs]; εὐ. πλόος, ὁδοί, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εὐθείᾳ (i.e. ὁδῷ) by the straight road, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν εὐ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πλήρης τοῦ εὐθέος tired of going straight forward, [Refs]; ἡ ἐς τὸ εὐ. τῆς ῥητορικῆς ὁδός the direct road to.., [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; κατ᾽ εὐθύ on level ground, [LXX]; but ἡ κατ᾽ εὐ. τάσις in the direct line, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; on the same side, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; also, opposed to εἰς τὸ ἐντός, [Refs 3rd…
εὐθέως
eutheos
adverb from 2117; directly, i.e. at once or soon:--anon, as soon as,
forthwith, immediately, shortly, straightway.
see GREEK for 2117
εὐθέως
Adv
immediately, soon
εὐθέως eutheōs 36x
immediately, instantly, at once, Mt. 8:3; 13:5
εὐθέως adverb of εὐθύς, q. v.
Adv — Adverbadverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined
93 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 33 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Μωυσῆς δ’ ἑκάτερον ὑπερβάς, τὸ μὲν ὡς ἄσκεπτον καὶ ἀταλαίπωρον καὶ ἀφιλόσοφον, τὸ δ’ ὡς κατεψευσμένον καὶ μεστὸν γοητείας, παγκάλην καὶ σεμνοτάτην ἀρχὴν ἐποιήσατο τῶν νόμων, μήτ’ εὐθὺς ἃ χρὴ πράττειν ἢ τοὐναντίον ὑπειπὼν μήτ’, ἐπειδὴ προτυπῶσαι τὰς…
κατʼ αὐτὴν δὲ ταύτην τὴν ἡμέραν εὐθὺς φυτά τε καὶ σπέρματα γῆθεν ἀνέτειλε.
ἐπισταθέντων δὲ τῶν παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ λεγόντων: Πρὸς σὲ εἰσῆλθον οἱ κατάσκοποι τῆς γῆς ἡμῶν: ἐξάγαγε αὐτούς, ὁ γὰρ βασιλεὺς οὕτως κελεύει, ἥδε ἀπεκρίθη: Εἰσῆλθον μὲν οἱ ἄνδρες, οὓς ζητεῖτε, πρός με, ἀλλ̓ εὐθέως ἀπῆλθον καὶ πορεύονται τῇ ὁδῷ:…
r Πισάις Ἡρακλήῳ χαίρειν. ὅταν πρὸς ἀνάγκην θέλῃς παρʼ ἐμοῦ χρήσασθαί τι, εὐθύς σε οὐ κρατῶ, καὶ νῦν παρακληθεὶς τοὺς τρεῖς στατῆρας οὓς εἴρηκέ σοι Σέλευκος δοῦναί
ἐπεὶ κολάζομαι αὐτῶν εἰς Ἀφροδίτην πόλιν, καὶ θέρισον τὸν ὄγμον τῆς Ἀπιάδος καὶ λύσεις εὐθέως εἰς Ἀ … … τὰ δράγματα, καὶ τοὺς ἐλαιῶνας τοὺς ἐν τῇ Ἀπιάδι σκάψον.
ὅτι καταλαμβάνω σε, καὶ ποιῶ. ἐάν σοι οὖν δοκεῖ, κύριε, ἐλθεῖν πρὸς ἡμᾶς, καὶ εὐθέως γείνεται τὸ ἔργον· ἐξήτακα γὰρ, καὶ λέγουσιν ὅτι δυνατόν ἐστιν. ἀσπάζομαι τὴν Νόνναν καὶ
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word Ἰησοῦς (*Iēsous*) refers primarily to Jesus, the Savior, and is derived from the Hebrew name Joshua or Jehoshua. It appears frequently in the New Testament, denoting Jesus Christ, and also refers to other figures named Jesus, such as Jesus, son of Eliezer, and Jesus Justus. The entries consistently identify it as a common name among Israelites.
Ἰησοῦς, -οὔ, dat. -οὔ, ace. -vdv, voc. -od, [W. § 10, 1], 6, Jesus (ΠῚ and ace. to a later form jw, Syr. > ” Saas, i. e. whose help is Jehovah; Germ. Gotthilf; but later writ. gave the name the force of My31w, see Mt. i. 21, cf. Sir. xlvi. 1 Ἰησοῦς ὃς ἐγένετο κατὰ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ μέγας ἐπὶ σωτηρίᾳ ἐκλεκτῶν αὐτοῦ, of Joshua, the successor of Moses; Philo, nom. mutat. § 21 Ἰησοῦς ἑρμηνεύεται σωτηρία κυρίου), a very Com. prop. name among the Israelites; cf. Delitzsch, Der Jesusname, in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 209 sq. [or Talmud. Stud. xv.]. Inthe N. T. 1. Joshua [fully Jehoshua], the famous captain of the Israelites, Moses’ successor: Acts vii. 45; Heb. iv. 8. 2. Jesus, son of Eliezer, one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 29 L T Tr WH. 3. Jesus, the Son of God, the Saviour of mankind: Mt. i. 21, 25; ΓΚ. i. 31; ii. 21, and very often; see κύριος and Χριστός. 4. Jesus…
Read the full entry →Ἰησοῦς nor in language of disrespect to the established religion of our city”: see further CRE® p. 260, and Lightfoot Assays on Supernatural Religion, p. 299f., who cites an inscr. found in this very temple of Ephesus, though of a later date than the passage in Acts,—éorw ἱεροσυλία kal ἀσέβεια, ““let it be regarded as sacrilege and impiety” (Wood Zzscr. vi. I, p. 14). Other exx. of the adj. from the inscrr. are Syll 523% (iii/B.c.) ὁ δὲ εἴπας ἢ [πρήξ]ας τι παρὰ τόνδε τὸν νόμον .. . ἔστω ἱερόσυλος, 2). 6028 (iv/iii B.c.) ἢν δέ τις [τὴν στήλην] ἀφαν[(ζηι ἢ τὰ γράμματα], πασχέτω ὡς ἱερόσυλος, and 24. 680!° (Rom.). The new Menander shows several exx. of ἱερόσυλε used in abuse with a general sense (cf. ‘‘ horse-thief’’): e.g. Menandrea, p. 60 388 tep[d]ovde παῖ, Ρ. 3852: ἱερόσυλε…
Read the full entry →Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.
Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)
Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.
Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)
Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Joshua.
Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)
Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.
Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)
Ἰησοῦς
Iesous
of Hebrew origin (3091); Jesus (i.e. Jehoshua), the name of our Lord
and two (three) other Israelites:--Jesus.
see HEBREW for 03091
Ἰησοῦς, οῦ, ὁ
n.m.
Jesus
Ἰησοῦς Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour, NTest.
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
je'-zus (Iesous, for yehoshua`):
(1) Joshua, son of Nun (the King James Version Ac 7:45; Heb 4:8; compare 1 Macc 2:55; 2 Esdras 7:37).
(2) (3) High priest and Levite.
See JESHUA, 2, 5.
(4) Son of Sirach.
See SIRACH.
(5) An ancestor of Jesus (Lu 3:29, the King James Version "Jose").
(6) (7) See the next three articles.
Jesus
(1.) Joshua, the son of Nun (Acts 7:45; Heb. 4:8; R.V., “Joshua”).
(2.) A Jewish Christian surnamed Justus (Col. 4:11).
Je’sus, the proper, as Christ is the official, name of our Lord. To distinguish him from others so called, he is spoken of as “Jesus of Nazareth” (John 18:7), and “Jesus the son of Joseph” (John 6:42).
This is the Greek form of the Hebrew name Joshua, which was originally Hoshea (Num. 13:8, 16), but changed by Moses into Jehoshua (Num. 13:16;
called Jestus, a Christian who was with St. Paul at Rome. (Colossians 4:11) (A.D. 57.)
savior; deliverer
988 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 43 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι „ἀκούσας Ἰησοῦς τῆς φωνῆς τοῦ λαοῦ κεκραγότων εἶπε πρὸς Μωυσῆν·
ὁ δὲ τῆς πληθύος ἀποκρίνας πᾶν τὸ μάχιμον Ἰησοῦν ἐφίστησιν αὐτῷ Ναυήκου μὲν υἱὸν φυλῆς τῆς Ἐφραιμίτιδος, ἀνδρειότατον δὲ καὶ πόνους ὑποστῆναι γενναῖον καὶ νοῆσαί τε καὶ εἰπεῖν ἱκανώτατον καὶ θρησκεύοντα τὸν θεὸν ἐκπρεπῶς καὶ Μωυσῆν διδάσκαλον τῆς…
ταῦτα οὖν κατήργησεν, ἵνα ὁ καινὸς νόμος τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἄνευ ζυγοῦ ἀνάγκης ὤν, μὴ ἀνθρωποποίητον ἔχῃ τὴν προσφοράν.
οτο Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ … … ιλείας τοῦ θειοτάτου … … Τιβερίου τοῦ ωηις
r ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου καὶ δεσπότου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν. ὑπατείας τοῦ αὐτοῦ εὐσεβεστάτου ἡμῶν δεσπότου ἔτους ιϛ,
r ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου καὶ δεσπότου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν. Βασιλείας τοῦ εὐσεβεστάτου καὶ φιλανθρώπου ἡμῶν δεσπότου Φλαουίου
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word ἐξέρχομαι, transliterated as exerchomai, is built from the prefix ἐξ meaning 'out of' and the root ἔρχομαι meaning 'to come' or 'to go.' It generally means to go or come out of a place, and can also refer to escaping, departing, or proceeding. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including the expulsion of demons and the release of prisoners.
ἐξ-έρχομαι,
[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for יצא, also for עלה ,בֹּוא, etc. ;]
depon.,
ἐξέρχομαι ; impf. eEnpyounv; fut. ἐξελεύσομαι; 2 aor. ἐξῆλθον, plur. 2 pers. ἐξήλθετε, 3 pers. ἐξῆλθον, and in LT Tr WH the Atex. forms (see ἀπέρχομαι, init.) ἐξήλGare (Mt. xi. 7, 8,9; xxvi.55; Mk. xiv. 48, ete.), ἐξῆλθαν (1 Jn. ii. 19; 2Jn. 7 [here Tdf. -Ao0v; 3 Jn. 7, ete.]); pe. ἐξελήλυθα;: plpf. ἐξεληλύθειν (Lk. viii. 38, ete.) ; Sept. for N¥? times without number ; to go or come out of; 1. properly; a. with mention of the place out of which one goes, or of the point from which he departs; a. of those who leave a place of their own accord: with the gen. alone, Mt. x.14 (1, Τ Tr WH insert ἔξω) ; Acts xvi. 39RG. foll. by ἐκ : Mk. v. 2; vii. 31; Jn. iv. 30; viii. 59; Acts vii. 3 sq.; 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xviii. 4, ete. foll. by ἔξω with gen. — with addition of εἰς and ace. of place, Mt. xxi. 17; Mk. xiv. 68; or παρά with ace. of place, Acts xvi. 13; or πρός twa, ace. of pers., Heb. xiii.…
Read the full entry →ἐξέρχομαι. For this verb in its ordinary sense it is sufficient to cite P Oxy II. 282" (a complaint against a wife—a.D. 30-35) kata πέρ[α]ς ἐξῆλθε] kal ἀπηνέκαντο (/. —éyKavto) τὰ ἡμέτερα, ‘finally she left the house and they carried off my belongings,” 26. III. 472! (c. A.D. 130) ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκείνου οἰκίας ἐξεληλύθει, 25. 5287 (ii/a.D.) ἀφ᾽ ὡς ἐκξῆλθες (1. €E—) ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ πένθος ἡγούμην, ‘‘ever since you Jeft me I have been in mourning” (Edd.): cf. for the constr. with ἀπό, Lk 55. P Oxy I. 1128 (iii/iv A.D.) δήλωσόν por ἢ πλοίῳ éépx [et] ἢ ὄνῳ shows the verb followed by the instrumental dat.: cf. Jn 21%. For ἐξέρχομαι of the driving forth of demons, as in Mk 178 a/., cf. the magical P Par 5741248 (ili/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 114) ἔξελθε, Satpov,. . . Kal ἀπόστηθι ἀπὸ τοῦ 8(e)i(va), and for the verb followed by ἔπί cf. P Tebt 11. 283° (B.c. 93 or 60) ἐξελήλυθεν ἐπὶ τὴν + + μητέρα pov, “‘made…
Read the full entry →ἐξέρχομαι (exerchomai) — to go out.
ἐξέρχομαι,
future -ελεύσομαι (but in Attic dialect ἔξειμι (A) supplies the future, also imperfect ἐξῄειν): aorist 2 ἐξῆλθον, the only tense used in [Refs 8th c.BC+]:— go or come out of, with genitive loci, τείχεος, πυλάων, πόληος, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐ. δωμάτων, χθονός, etc., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of an actor, come out on the stage, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, come forth, ἐ. καὶ ἀμῦναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]
__b rarely with accusative, ἐξῆλθον τὴν Περσίδα χώραν [LXX+5th c.BC+]
__c absolutely, march out, go forth, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__d of an accused person, withdraw from the country to avoid trial, opposed to φεύγω, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
ἐξέρχομαι
exerchomai
from 1537 and 2064; to issue (literally or figuratively):--come
(forth, out), depart (out of), escape, get out, go (abroad, away,
forth, out, thence), proceed (forth), spread abroad.
see GREEK for 1537
see GREEK for 2064
ἐξέρχομαι
v.
I go out, come out
ἐξέρχομαι exerchomai 218x
to go or come out of; to come out, Mt. 5:26; 8:34; to proceed, emanate, take rise from, Mt. 2:6; 15:18; 1 Cor. 14:36; to come abroad, 1 Jn. 4:1; to go forth, go away, depart, Mt. 9:31; Lk. 5:8; to escape, Jn. 10:39; to pass away, come to an end, Acts 16:19
ἐξέρχομαι fut. -ελεύσομαι in attic ἔξειμι supplies the fut., as also the imperf. ἐξῄειν aor2 ἐξῆλθον Dep.:— to go or come out of, c. gen. loci, Hom., Hdt., etc.; of an actor, to come out on the stage, Ar.:—also c. acc., ἐξ. τὴν χώρην Hdt.:—absol. to go away, march off, Il.: also, to march out, go forth, ἐπί τινα Hdt.:—c. acc. cogn. to go out on an expedition, Xen.: to go through a work, Soph.
ἐξ. εἰς ἔλεγχον to stand forth and come to the trial, Eur.: to turn out so and so, Soph.
c. acc. rei, to execute, Thuc.
of Time, to come to an end, expire, Hdt., Soph.
of prophecies, dreams, events, to be accomplished, come true, Hdt.; ὀρθὸν ἐξ. to come out right, Soph.; μὴ ἐξέλθῃ σαφής lest he turn out a true prophet, id. Soph.
Verb-2AAP-NPN — Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
V-2AAP-NPN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter
220 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 85 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 217 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 332 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
"ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου“ (Gen.
ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.
νῦν δὲ ὅ λέγει: τὰ φύλλα οὐκ ἀπορυήσεται, τοῦτο λέγει: ὅτι πᾶν ῥῆμα, ὃ ἐὰν ἐξελεύσεται ἐξ ὑμῶν διὰ τοῦ στόματος ὑμῶν ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ, ἔσται εἰς ἐπιστροφὴν καὶ ἐλπίδα πολλοῖς.
Σωκράτης Ἀθηνοδώρῳ καὶ Ἀμμωνίῳ ἀμφοτέροις χαίρειν. καλῶς ποιήσετε ἐξελθόντες εἰς Τιβεριανὴν στομώσαντες τὰ σιδήρια τῶν σκληρουργῶν. ἄχρηστα γὰρ πάντα τὰ σιδήρια ἅπαξ ἵνα
τιμιωτάτοις χαίρειν. καλῶς ποιήσετε ἐπεὶ οἱ σκληρουργοὶ λέγουσίν μοι ὅτι οὐχ εἰσερχόμεθα ἔσω στομῶντες ἐξελθόντες στομώσατε. καὶ γράφετε ἡμᾶς ἀργεῖν. ἐκ δύο τὸ … ἓν δρᾶ, ἵνα στομώσητε ἢ
σφῆνας εὐχαριστοῦμεν αὐτοῖς. βέβληται καὶ ἐπιβεβλήμεθα … τὴν πλάκα. εἰ οὖν θέλεις ἵνα ἀπαρτισθῇ, ἔξελθε στομώσειν αὐτοῖς καὶ ἆρον αὐτῶν τὴν πρόφασιν μετὰ δύο σφυροκόπων Μα … Μωνισπος
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NPN — Article · nominative · plural · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
T-NPN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word πνεῦμα (i.e., *pneuma*) means 'spirit' or 'breath' and is derived from the verb πνέω (to blow). It encompasses various meanings, including air in motion, the vital principle of life, and spiritual beings such as angels and demons. In the New Testament, it frequently refers to the Holy Spirit and the human spirit, appearing in contexts that contrast it with the body or flesh.
From the words into comparison with which πνεῦμα is here brought, it will be evident that it is proposed to deal with it in its natural and earthly, not in its supernatural and heavenly, meaning. Only I will observe, that on the relations between πνοή and πνεῦμα in this its higher sense there is a discussion in Augustine, De Civ. Dei, xiii. 22; cf. De Anim. et huj. Orig. i. 14, 19. The first three words of this group, as they designate not things heavenly but things earthly, differ from one another exactly as, according to Seneca, do in the Latin ‘aér,’ ‘spiritus,’ ‘ ventus’ (Nat. Qu. v. 13) : ‘Spiritum a vento motus' separat; vehementior enim spiritus ventus est; invicem spiritus leviter fluens aer.’ Πνοή and πνεῦμα occur not seldom together, as at Isai. xlii. 5; lvii. 16; πνοή conveying the impression of a lighter, gentler, motion of the air than πνεῦμα, as ‘aura’ than ‘ventus.’…
Read the full entry →πνεῦμα, -τος, τό, (πνέω), Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Hebr. may, Lat. spiritus; i. 6. 1. a movement of air, (gentle) blast; a. of the wind: ἀνέμων πνεύματα, Hat. 7,16, 1; Paus. 5, 25; hence the wind itself, Jn. iii. 8; plur. Heb. i. 7, (1 K. xviii. 45; xix. 11; Job i. 19; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 4, etc.; often in Grk. writ.). b. breath of the nostrils or mouth, often in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down: πνεῦμα τοῦ στόματος, 2 Th. ii. 8 (Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 6, ef. Is. xi. 4); mv. ζωῆς, the breath of life, Rev. xi. 11 (Gen. vi. 17, cf. πνοὴ ζωῆς, il. 7). [πνεῦμα and πνοή seem to have been in the main coincident terms; but avon became the more poetical. Both retain a suggestion of their evident etymology. Even in class. Grk. πνεῦμα became as freq. and as wide in its application as ἄνεμος. (Schmidt ch. 55, 7; Trench § lxxiii.) ] 2. the spirit, i.e. the vital principle by which the body 18…
Read the full entry →πνεῦμα. This is a notable ex. of those words, whose meaning has been so deepened and enriched through Christian influences, that we cannot expect our sources to throw much light on their use in the NT. One or two points may, however, be noted. Thus for the more literal meaning of the word we may cite P Oxy VI. 9047 (v/A.D.), where a certain Flavius petitions a praeses on the ground ὡς λοιπὸν εἰς αὐτὸ τὸ τῆς σωτηρίας πνεῦμα δυστυχῖν pe, “so that at last the very breath of my life is in danger” (Edd.). In P Leid Wii 2 (ii/iii A.D.) (= II. p. 157) reference is made to a book which περιέχει γέννησιν πνεύματος, πυρὸς Kal okdTo(=ov)s, ‘contains the creation of spirit, fire and darkness.” The same document αν. 4 shows οὐ ἀντιτάξεταί μοι πᾶν πνεῦμα, οὐ δαιμόνιον, οὐ συνάτ(--άντ)ημα. Reminiscent of LXX Numb 1622, 2716, isthe Jewish ‘‘ prayer for vengeance” from Rheneia, Sy// 816 (=#1181)*, which…
Read the full entry →πνεῦμα (pneuma) — spirit/breath: spirit.
πνεῦμα, ατος, τό,
(πνέω) blast, wind, first in [Refs 6th c.BC+]: frequently in Trag., etc., ἀνέμων πνεύματα πάντων [Refs 4th c.BC+]; θαλάσσας.. πνεύματι λάβρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] is commoner in Poets; [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κατὰ πρύμναν ἵσταται τὸ π.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ πνεῦμα στῆναι τοῦ ἄρρενος to leeward of him, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but κατὰ π. προσιόντες down wind, [Refs]; πνεύματος ἀνείλησις, ἐκπύρωσις, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; as an element, air, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]
2. metaphorically, θαλερωτέρῳ π. with more genial breeze or influence, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; αἰδοίῳ π. χώρας with air or spirit of respect on the part of the country, [Refs]; π. ταὐτὸν οὔποτ᾽.. ἐν ἀνδράσιν φίλοις βέβηκεν the…
πνεῦμα
pneuma
from 4154; a current of air, i.e. breath (blast) or a breeze; by
analogy or figuratively, a spirit, i.e. (human) the rational soul, (by
implication) vital principle, mental disposition, etc., or
(superhuman) an angel, demon, or (divine) God, Christ's spirit, the
Holy Spirit:--ghost, life, spirit(-ual, -ually), mind. Compare 5590.
see GREEK for 4154
see GREEK for 5590
πνεῦμα, ατος, τό
n.n.
wind, breath, spirit
πνεῦμα pneuma 379x
wind, air in motion, Jn. 3:8; breath, 2 Thess. 2:8; the substance spirit, Jn. 3:6; a spirit, spiritual being, Jn. 4:24; Acts 23:8, 9; Heb. 1:14; a bodiless spirit, specter, Lk. 24:37; a foul spirit, δαιμόνιον, Mt. 8:16; Lk. 10:20; spirit, as a vital principle, Jn. 6:63; 1 Cor.…
Read the full entry →πνεῦμα πνεῦμα, ατος, τό, πνέω a blowing, πνεύματα ἀνέμων Hdt., Aesch.: alone, a wind, blast, Trag., etc.
metaph., θαλερωτέρῳ πν. with more genial breeze or influence, Aesch.; λύσσης πν. μάργῳ id. Aesch.; πν. ταὐτὸν οὔποτ᾽ ἐν ἀνδράσιν φίλοις βέβηκεν the wind is constantly changing even among friends, Soph.
like Lat. spiritus or anima, breathed air, breath, Aesch.; πν. βίου the breath of life, id. Aesch.; πν. ἀθροίζειν to collect breath, Eur.; πν. ἀφιέναι, ἀνιέναι, μεθιέναι to give up the ghost, id. Eur.; πνεύματος διαρροαί the wind-pipe, id. Eur.
that is breathed forth, odour, scent, id. Eur.
spirit, Lat. afflatus, Anth.: inspiration, NTest.
the spirit of man, id. NTest.
Noun-NPN — Noun · nominative · plural · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
N-NPN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter
385 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 379 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 173 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.
ταύτης δʼ ὑπʼ ὄψιν οὐκ ἐρχομένης, ἀλλὰ βαθεῖ μὲν κρυπτομένης σκότει, πνεύματος δʼ αὐτὴν ἄνωθεν ἐπιθέοντος, γενέσθαι φῶς ἐκέλευσεν ὁ θεός.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
ἐν ὀνόματι τῆς ἁγίας καὶ ὁμοουσίου τριάδος πατρὸς καὶ υἱοῦ καὶ ἁγίου πνεύματος βασιλείας τοῦ θειοτάτου καὶ εὐσεβεστάτου ἡμῶν δεσπότου Φλαυίου Φωκᾶ τοῦ αἰωνίου Αὐγούστου Αὐτοκράτορος καὶ
r ἐν ὀνόματι τῆς ἁγίας τριάδος πατρὸς καὶ υἱοῦ καὶ ἁγίου πνεύματος καὶ τῆς δεσποίνης ἡμῶν τῆς θεοτόκου καὶ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων, βασιλείας τοῦ θειοτάτου καὶ
ἐν ὀνόματι τῆς ἁγίας καὶ ὁμοουσίου τριάδος πατρὸς καὶ υἱοῦ καὶ ἁγίου πνεύματος καὶ τῆς δεσποίνης
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NPN — Article · nominative · plural · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
T-NPN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word ἀκάθαρτος (akathartos) means unclean or impure, derived from a negative prefix and a root meaning cleansed. It covers physical, ceremonial, and moral impurity, appearing in contexts related to food, demonic spirits, and moral behavior. The New Testament references include Acts 10:14, 28 and Ephesians 5:5. Notably, it is frequently associated with unclean spirits in the Gospels.
ἀκάθαρτος, -ον
(< ἀ- neg., καθαίρω),
[in LXX chiefly for טָמֵא;]
unclean, impure;
physically (LS, MM, VGT, s.v.);
ceremonially: Ac 10:14, 28 11:8, I Co 7:14, II Co 6:17, Re 18:2;
ἀκάθαρτος, -ov, (kabaipw), [fr. Soph. down], in the Sept. i. q. $V, not cleansed, unclean ; a. inaceremonial sense, that which must be abstained from according to the levitical law, lest impurity be contracted: Acts x. 14; xi. 8 (of food); Acts x. 28; 1 Co. vii. 14 (of men); 2 Co. vi. 17 (fr. Is. lii. 11, of things pertaining to idolatry); Rev. xviii. 2 (of birds). b. in a moral sense, unclean in thought and life (freq. in Plat.) : Eph. v. 5; τὰ ἀκάθαρτα τῆς πορνείας, Rev. xvii. 4 (ace. to the true reading); πνεύματα, demons, bad angels, [in twenty-three pass. of the Gospels, Acts, Rev.]: Mt. x. 1; xu. 43; Mk.i. 23, 26; i. 11, ete.; Lk. iv. 38, 36; vi. 18, ete.; Acts v. 16; viii. 7; Rev. xvi. 13; xviii. 2, (πνεύματα πονηρά in Mt. xii. 45; Lk. vii. 21; viii. 2; xi. 26; Acts xix. 12 sq. 15 sq.).
ἀκάθαρτος. The adjective is found in a moral sense of an unclean demon in the long magical papyrus P Par 5741°38 (= Se/ections, p. 113). It occurs in the correspondence of the architect Cleon (B.c. 255-4), P Petr II. 4, (3)§ (p. [8]), εἰλήφαμεν δὲ τοῦ ἀκαθάρτου kal τὸ [. . ., where the ganger Apollonius seems to be writing about a supply of iron for quarrymen, but the mutilation prevents our determining the reference. Vettius Valens, p. 761, has πάθεσιν ἀκαθάρτοις kal παρὰ φύσιν ἡδοναῖς, where the ethical sense is completely developed : half way comes Sy// 6338 (ii/A.D. according to Michel), where a Lycian named Xanthus dedicates a shrine to Mén Tyrannus and says καὶ [μηθένα] ἀκάθαρτον προσάγειν " καθαριζέστω δὲ ἀπὸ o(k)dpSwv καῇ Xotpéwy] κα[ὶ γ]υναικός --ἴῃξ impurity is ritual. ἀκαίρως. The well-known letter of a prodigal son, BGU III. 84614* (ii/A.D.) ( = Selections, p. 94) has the…
Read the full entry →ἀκάθαρτος (akathartos) — unclean.
ἀκᾰθαρ-τος, ον,
(καθαίρω) uncleansed, foul, ἀήρ[Refs 5th c.BC+] of the body, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a woman, quae menstrua non habet, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of ceremonial impurity, [LXX]
__b unpurified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. morally unclean, impure, [Refs 5th c.BC+]thou beast! [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ={μανιώδης}, [NT+5th c.BC+]. adverb ἀκαθάρτως, ἔχειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. ofthings, notpurgedaway, unpurged, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. b unpruned, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
3. c ceremonially unclean, of food, [LXX+NT]
3. d not sifted, containing impurities, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]
II. active, not fit for cleansing, [φάρμακα] ἑλκέων ἀκαθαρτότερα[Refs 2nd c.AD+]
ἀκάθαρτος
akathartos
from 1 (as a negative particle) and a presumed derivative of 2508
(meaning cleansed); impure (ceremonially, morally (lewd) or specially,
(demonic)):--foul, unclean.
see GREEK for 1
see GREEK for 2508
ἀκάθαρτος, ον
Adj
unclean, impure
ἀκάθαρτος akathartos 32x
impure, unclean; lewd; foul
ἀκάθαρτος καθαίρω uncleansed, unclean, impure, Plat.:—adv., ἀκαθάρτως ἔχειν id. Plat.
of things, not purged away, Soph.
Adj-NPN — Adjective · nominative · plural · neuternominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
A-NPN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter
See CLEAN.
→ (Ceremonially speaking)
Creatures designated as such Le 11; De 14
→ See UNCLEANNESS
32 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 119 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„ἐξαποστειλάτωσαν ἐκ τῆς ἁγίου ψυχῆς πάντα λεπρὸν καὶ πάντα γονορρυῆ καὶ πάντα ἀκάθαρτον ἐν ψυχῇ, ἀπὸ ἀρσενικοῦ ἕως θηλυκοῦ“ (Num.
τὸν δὲ Βόκχοριν τοὺς χρησμοὺς λαβόντα τούς τε ἱερεῖς καὶ ἐπιβωμίτας προσκαλεσάμενον κελεῦσαι ἐπιλογὴν ποιησαμένους τῶν ἀκαθάρτων τοῖς στρατιώταις τούτους παραδοῦναι κατάξειν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν ἔρημον, τοὺς δὲ λεπροὺς εἰς μολιβδίνους χάρτας ἐνδήσαντας,…
οὐ μή, φησίν, γενηθῇς τοιοῦτος, οἵους ἀκούομεν ἀνομίαν ποιοῦντας ἐν τῷ στόματι δἰ ἀκαθαρσίαν, οὐδὲ κολληθήσῃ ταῖς ἀκαθάρτοις ταῖς τὴν ἀνομίαν ποιούσαις ἐν τῷ στόματι.
ρ … ς ὅπως ἂν τὰ ἔργα συντελῆται … χρηστοῦ, εἰλήφαμεν δὲ τοῦ ἀκαθάρτου καὶ τὸ … εως εἶναι τὸ διάφορον παρὰ τὰς δ δραχμὰς δύο ὀβολοὶ
The Greek word εἰσέρχομαι (*eiserchomai*) means to enter, either literally or figuratively. It is composed of the prefix εἰς (into) and the root ἔρχομαι (to come). This term is used in various contexts in the New Testament, including entering a house (Matthew 8:5) or the kingdom of God (Matthew 7:13). It can also refer to entering into states of being or experiences, such as hope or temptation.
εἰσ-έρχομαι,
[in LXX chiefly for בּוֹא ;]
to go in or into, enter: Mt 9:25, Lk 7:45, al.; seq. εἰς, Mt 10:12, Mk 2:1, al.; seq. διά (πύλης, θύρας, etc.), Mt 7:13, Jo 10:1, al.; ὑπὸ τ. στέγην, Mt 8:8; c. adv.: ὅπου, Mk 14:14, He 6:20; ὧδε, Mt 22:12; ἔσω, Mt 26:58; seq. πρός, c acc. pers., Mk…
Read the full entry →εἰσ-έρχομαι ; fut. εἰσελεύσομαι ; 2 aor. εἰσῆλθον, 2 pers. plur. εἰσήλθατε (Lk. xi. 52, but Rec. -@ere), impy. εἰσέλθατε (Mt. vii. 13 but R ἃ -θετε, [3d pers. sing. -θάτω Mk. xiii. 15, R G -θέτω]) ; see ἀπέρχομαι, init. ; pi. εἰσελήλυθα, 3 pers. plur. εἰσελήλυθαν (Jas. v. 4, for RG εἰσεληλύθασιν, see γίνομαι, init.); Sept. mostly for 8)3; to go or come into or in; to enter; 1. prop., of men and of animals: foll. by eis with specification of the place (cf. Win. De verb. comp. ete. Pt. ii. p. 12 sq-), as into a house, into a city, Mt. viii. 5; x. 12; Mk. ii. 1; xi. 11; Acts xxiii. 16, 33, and often. without specification of place, —when mention of it has already been made, as Mt. ix. 25; [Mk. vii. 25 Tdf.]; Lk. vii. 45; xiv. 23; xv. 28 ef. 25; xxiv.3; Actsi. 13; v. 7,10; x. 25; 1 Co. xiv. 23 sq. ; or it can be easily supplied from the context, as Lk. xiii. 24; xvii. 7; εἰς is also added…
Read the full entry →εἰσέρχομαι. With the use of εἰσέρχομαι in Lk 177 we may compare P Eleph 138 (B.c. 223-2) οὔπω εἰσελήλυθεν ἐξ ἀγροῦ. For other examples of this common verb, cf. P Ryl 11. 151° (A.D. 40) εἰσελθὼν εἰς τὴν ὑ[πάρ]χοί(υσαν) ἐν τῇ κώμῃ οἰκ[ίαν, P Oxy ID. 237% 17 (a.p. 186) τὸν μείζονα ἀγῶνα e[i]oeXevoerat, ‘he shall enter upon the more serious lawδι (Edd.), and P Tebt 11. 4188 (iii/A.D.) καλῶς ποιήσεις, ἀδελφέ, [ἐϊὰν εἰσέρχῃ ἐνεγκὼν μετὰ σεαυτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκά μου, ἔγραψα [γ]ὰρ αὐτῇ σὺν σοὶ εἰσελθεῖν, “you will do well, brother, to come up and bring my wife with you, for I have written to her to come with you’’ (Edd.). See also P Leid W¥-4! (ii/iii A.D.) Κύριε... . εἴσελθε καὶ ἐπάκουσόν por. On the use of the mid. εἰσέλθοιτο for the active in Phrygian sepulchral inscrr. see W. M. Ramsay Exp T xxvi. p.…
Read the full entry →εἰσέρχομαι (eiserchomai) — to enter.
εἰσέρχομαι,
future -ειεύσομαι: aorist -ήλῠθον, -ῆλθον: in Attic dialect, future is supplied by εἴσειμι, and imperfect by εἰσῄειν:— go in or into, enter, in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄλσος, δόμους, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰσῆλθ᾽ ἑκατόμβας invaded the hecatombs, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but in Prose mostly with Preps., ἐς οἴκημα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς. ἐς τὰς σπονδάς come into the treaty, [Refs]; εἰς τὸν πόλεμον variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰ. εἰς τοὺς ἐφήβους enter the ranks of the Ephebi, [Refs]; also εἰ. πρός τινα enter his house, visit him, [Refs]; of a doctor, pay a visit, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, of money, etc., come in, προσόδους εἰσελθούσας [Refs]
Read the full entry →εἰσέρχομαι
eiserchomai
from 1519 and 2064; to enter (literally or figuratively):--X arise,
come (in, into), enter in(-to), go in (through).
see GREEK for 1519
see GREEK for 2064
εἰσέρχομαι
v.
I go in, come in, enter
εἰσέρχομαι eiserchomai 194x
to go or come in, enter, Mt. 7:13; 8:5, 8; spc. to enter by force, break in, Mk. 3:27; Acts 20:29; met. with εἰς κόσμον, to begin to exist, come into existence, Rom. 5:12; 2 Jn. 7; or, to make one’s appearance on earth, Heb. 10:5; to enter into or take possession of, Lk. 22:3; Jn. 13:27; to enter into, enjoy, partake of, Mt. 19:23, 24; to enter into any one’s labor, be his successor, Read the full entry →
εἰσέρχομαι fut. -ελεύσομαι aor2 -ήλυ^θον, -ῆλθον but attic fut. is supplied by εἴσειμι and imperf. by εἰσῄειν Dep.:— to go in or into, enter, c. acc., Il., etc.; in Prose, εἰς. εἰς . . , Xen., etc.; εἰς. εἰς τὰς σπονδάς to come into the treaty, Thuc.; εἰς. εἰς τοὺς ἐφήβους to enter the Ephebi, Xen.: of money, to come in, id. Xen.
of the chorus or of actors, to come upon the stage, to enter, Plat., Xen.:— to enter the lists, Soph.
as attic law-term, of the accuser, to come into court, Plat., Dem.
metaph., [μένος] ἄνδρας ἐσέρχεται courage enters into the men, Il.; Κροῖσον γέλως εἰσῆλθεalso c. dat., δέος εἰς. τινι Plat.:—also to come into one's mind, Hdt.; so, impers., εἰσῆλθε αὐτόν, c. inf., it comes into one's head that . . , id.…
Verb-2AAI-3P — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · pluralsecond aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2AAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural
194 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 67 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 192 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 333 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
διὸ καὶ Μωυσῆς φησιν ὅτι „οὐκ ἐάσει τὸν ὀλοθρεύοντα εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὰς οἰκίας ὑμῶν πατάξαι“ (Exod.
καὶ οἱ μὲν μηδὲ θύσαντες, οἱ δὲ ἡμιέργους τὰς θυσίας καταλιπόντες, πολλοὶ δʼ οὐδʼ ἀρχὴν εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν δυνηθέντες ἀπίασιν ὑπακούειν τοῖς Μωυσέος προστάγμασι μᾶλλον ἢ ποιεῖν τὰ κατὰ βούλησιν τὴν ἑαυτῶν προτιμῶντες, καὶ τὸν ἐλέγξοντα περὶ…
Ἰδού, τάδε λέγει κύριος ὁ θεός: Εἰσέλθατε εἰς τὴν γῆν τὴν ἀγαθήν, ἣν ὤμοσεν κύριος τῷ Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαὰκ καὶ Ἰακώβ, καὶ κατακληρονομήσατε αὐτήν, γῆν ῥέουσαν γάλα καὶ μέλι.
τῆς Θεμίστου μερίδος. Ἡραῒς γυνὴ Ἡρακλᾶτος τοῦ Π … … τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς κώμης εἰσελθοῦσα εἰς τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν ἐν τῇ κώμῃ οἰκίαν καὶ συλλαβοῦσα τὴν θυγατέρα μου ἔδωκεν πληγὰς
r Θαυβᾶς Πομπηίωι τῶι πατρὶ χαίρειν. καλῶς ποιήσεις λαβὼν τὴν ἐπιστολήν μου ἐξαυτῆς εἰσελθὼν διὰ τὸ τὴν ταλαίπωρον θυγατέρα σου Ἑρεννίαν τετελευτηκέναι καὶ ἤδη εὐτυχῆσθαιτῷ Φαῶφι τῆι ἐνάτηι
μερίδος στρατηγοῦ … … ος τὸ ὑπογεγραμμένον ε … ως ἐξ ἡμῶν ἄνδρες ι εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὸν κράτιστον πρὸς τῷ ἰδίῳ λόγῳ ἠξίουν ἐξετασθῆναι πότερον πραταὶ αἱ τάξεις εἰσὶν
εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'
εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…
Read the full entry →εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…
Read the full entry →εἰς (eis) — toward.
ἐν εἰς
or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:
Read the full entry →εἰς
eis
a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or
entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);
also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,
(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more
exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,
+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the
intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at
one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the
end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often
used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs
(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).
εἰς
Prep.
into, in, among, till, for
εἰς
into, to c. acc.
PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:
OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.
with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·
ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς
καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν
ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-APM — Article · accusative · plural · masculineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
T-APM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word χοῖρος (i.e., *choiros*) means 'swine' or 'pig.' It is a masculine noun and appears in various contexts, including the New Testament in passages like Matthew 8:30-32 and Mark 5:11-13. The entries indicate it can refer to both young pigs and swine in general, with some lexicons noting its use in sacrifices. There is no significant disagreement among the lexicons regarding its meaning.
** χοῖρος, -ου, ὁ
[in Sm.: Is 65:4 66:3 ;]
a swine: pl., Mt 7:6 8:30-32, Mk 5:11-13, 16, Lk 8:32, 33 15:15, 16 †
χορός, -οὔ, 6, (by metath. fr. dpxos, ὀρχέομαι, [(?); prob. related to χύρτος (Lat. hortus), χρόνος, ete., denoting primarily ‘an enclosure for dancing ’; ef. Curtius § 189), fr. Hom. down, a band (of dancers and singers), a circular dance, a dance, dancing: Lk. xv. 25 (for npn, Ex. xv. 20; Judg. xi. 34, ete.; for Sinn, Lam. v. 15; Ps, cl. 4).
χοῖρος, “‘a pig”: P Tebt I. 190 (early i/B.c.) τιμὴν χοίρου (δραχμαὶ) ἢ, Chrest. I. 73° (a.p. 247-8) an order that πάντας τοὺς χοίρους ἐξελασθῆναι ἀπὸ ἱεροῦ κώμης Ἰάλμεως, in order that the sacred service may not be disturbed (cf. OG/S 210), P Flor II. 166!* (iii. a.p.) τὸν Χοῖρον καὶ τὰ δελφάκια (‘‘sucking pigs’’) τὰ B καλὰ παράδος Γρηγωρίῳ τῷ μαγείρῳ μου, ἀλλὰ ἤτω ὁ χοῖρος καλός, and P Oxy VI. gor® (a.p. 336) ἡμέτεροι χῦροι δύο τὴν ὁρμὴν ποιούμενοι ἐπὶ ἡμέτερον ἔδαφος (cf. Mk 513). For dim. χοιρίδιον, see P Ryl II. 22013 (a.p. 38) περὶ δὲ τῆς τροφῆς τῶν χοιριδίω(ν), and similarly 13, P Fay 1111 (A.D. 95-6) πεζῶι [τὰ χ]υρίδια ἐλάσαι, ‘to drive the pigs. on foot,” 20. 1157 (A.D. 101) μέλλομεν. . . χυρίδια θύειν εἰς τὰ γενέσια Σαβίνου, ‘‘ we intend to sacrifice pigs on the birthday feast of Sabinus’’ (Edd.), and P Oxy VI. 932!° (late 1i/A.D.) τὰ χοιρίδια χωρὶς pod μὴ πώλι, ‘do not sell…
Read the full entry →χοῖρος (choiros) — pig.
χοῖρος, ὁ
(ἡ [Refs 6th c.BC+]:— young pig, porker (younger than δέλφαξ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; offered as one of the smaller sacrifices, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__b generally, ={ὗς},{σῦς}, swine, ἤδη δέλφακες, χοῖροι δὲ τοῖσιν ἄλλοις [NT+5th c.BC+]
2. pudenda muliebria, frequently in Comedy texts poets, who are always punning on the word and its compounds, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {χοιρόσακον}, etc.; said to be a Corinthian usage, [Refs]
II. a fish of the Nile, [Refs 1st c.BC+] at Title Page (Perh. for ĝhoryo- 'grey', cf. Norse griss 'sucking-pig', OHG grīs 'grey', or[Refs 2nd c.AD+] de[rmacr] 'pig'.)
χοῖρος
choiros
of uncertain derivation; a hog:--swine.
χοῖρος, ου, ὁ
n.m.
swine
χοῖρος choiros 12x
pr. a young swine; a swine, hog, or sow, Mt. 8:30, 31, 32
χοῖρος χοῖρος, ὁ, ἡ, a young pig, porker, Od., etc.
Noun-APM — Noun · accusative · plural · masculineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
N-APM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
14 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 12 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
τὸ οὖν χοιρίον πρὸς τοῦτο εἶπεν: οὐ κολληθήσῃ φησίν, ἀνθρώποις τοιούτοις, οἵτινές εἰσιν ὅμοιοι χοίρων: τουτέστιν ὅταν σπαταλῶσιν, ἐπιλανθάνονται τοῦ κυρίου, ὅταν δὲ ὑστεροῦνται, ἐπιγινώσκουσιν τὸν κύριον, ὡς καὶ ὁ χοῖρος ὅταν τρώγει τὸν κύριον οὐκ…
τοῦ Τανείτου νομοῦ καταγεινομένου ἐν κώμῃ … ει μετʼ ἐγγύου ἐμοῦ τε καὶ τῶν χοίρων Ἀμουνίου … ιος Χώνσιος καὶ … ων πρεσβυτέρων Χενθήους καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων Χώνσιος
Φαρβαιθίτου παρὰ Πανταγάθου ἀπελευθέρου Λυσάνδρου Ὡρείωνος ἀπὸ Φαρβαίθων μετʼ ἐγγύου ἐμοῦ τε καὶ τῶν χοίρων Σαραπαπόλλωνος Διοσκόρου τοῦ Σαραπίωνος Σωσικοσμείου τοῦ καὶ Ἀλθαιέως. ὀμνύω τὴν Μάρκου Αὐρηλίου Κομμόδου Ἀντωνίνου
εντεθρη χοίροτρόφος ?. ἐπιζητοῦντί σοι, πόσους χοίρους ἐπὶ τοῦ παρόντος ἔχω, προσφωνῶ ὀμνύων τὴν Μάρκου Αὐρηλίου Κομμόδου Ἀντωνίνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word ὁρμάω (transliterated as hormao) is built from the root ὁρμή and covers meanings related to setting in motion, urging on, or rushing. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts where individuals are hastening or being incited to action, such as in Matthew 8:32 and Mark 5:13. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.
ὁρμάω, -@: 1 aor. ὥρμησα; (fr. ὁρμή); 1. trans. to set in rapid motion, stir up, incite, urge on; so fr. Hom. down. 2. intrans. to start forward impetuously, to rush, (so fr. Hom. down) : εἴς τι, Mt. vili. 32; Mk. v. 13; Lk. viii. 33; Acts xix. 29; ἐπί τινα, Acts vil. 57.
ὁρμάω (hormaō) — to stampede.
ὁρμάω,
future -ήσω[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ὥρμησα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Laconian dialect imperative ὅρμᾱον, i.e. ὅρμαὁν, ={ὅρμησον}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ὥρμηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle and passive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Epic dialect imperfect ὡρμᾶτο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future ὁρμήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ὡρμησάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+] (ἐφ-), never in Prose, except ἐξ- [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect ὥρμημαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]perfect and pluperfect ὁρμέαται and -έατο (with variants ὡρμ-) [Refs 8th c.BC+] codices usually have the augment, but [Refs 8th c.BC+]: (ὁρμή):
__A active,
I. causal, set in motion, urge on, cheer on, τινὰ εἰς πόλεμον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὁ. τινὰ ἐκ χερός tear from one's arms, [Refs] —passive, ὁρμηθεὶς θεοῦ ἄρχετο inspired by…
ὁρμάω
hormao
from 3730; to start, spur or urge on, i.e. (reflexively) to dash or
plunge:--run (violently), rush.
see GREEK for 3730
ὁρμάω
v.
I rush
ὁρμάω Act.
Causal, to set in motion, urge or push on, spur on, cheer on, Il., Hdt., attic:—Pass., ὁρμηθεὶς θεοῦ inspired by the god, Od.; so, πρὸς θεῶν ὡρμημένος Soph.
with a thing as the object, to stir up, πόλεμον Od.:— Pass., ὡρμάθη πλαγά was inflicted, Soph.
intr. to make a start, hasten on,
c. inf., ὃς ὁρμήσῃ διώκειν who starts in chase, Il.; ὁσσάκι δ᾽ ὁρμήσειε πυλάων ἀντίον ἀΐξασθαι whenever he started to rush against the gates, id. Il.: to begin to do, Hdt., Soph.
c. gen. to rush headlong at one, Il.; so, ὁρμᾶν ἐπί τινα Hdt., etc.; εἴς τινα, κατά τινα Xen.; ἐπὶ τὸ σκοπεῖν id. Xen., etc.: also, ὁρμ. ἐς μάχην to hasten to battle, Aesch.; εἰς ἀγῶνα Eur.
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singularaorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
5 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
καὶ ἀπέδρα αὐτὸς καὶ τὰ αὐτοῦ πάντα, καὶ διέβη τὸν ποταμὸν καὶ ὥρμησεν εἰς τὸ ὄρος Γαλαάδ“ (Gen.
Ἴσακος δέ, πατρὸς γὰρ ἦν οἵου τετυχηκότα γενναῖον ἔδει τὸ φρόνημα εἶναι, δέχεται πρὸς ἡδονὴν τοὺς λόγους καὶ φήσας, ὡς οὐδὲ γεγονέναι τὴν ἀρχὴν ἦν δίκαιος, εἰ θεοῦ καὶ πατρὸς μέλλει κρίσιν ἀπωθεῖσθαι καὶ μὴ παρέχειν αὑτὸν τοῖς ἀμφοτέρων βουλήμασιν…
ὑπʼ ἐμοῦ καὶ ἐμοῦ τὸν ψόφον ἀκούσαντος καὶ ἐγερθεὶς ἐκάλουν βοηθούς, οὕτως εἰς φυγὴν ὥρμησαν. τῆι δὲ ἐχομένῃ ἡμέραι ἅμʼ ἡμέραι ἐπῆγον τὸν ἐπιστάτην καὶ … τοὺς εἰρημένους, καὶ
Ἀνδρονίκου ἱμάτιον ἀπηλλάγη ἔχουσα. οἱ δὲ σὺν τοῖς περὶ τὸν Κόσωνα ὄντες εἰς φυγὴν ὥρμησαν . μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τοὺς διασαφουμένους Ἐπιμάχωι τῶι παρὰ τοῦ φρουράρχου ἐπιπαραγενηθέντες Νικόδημός
οἷς καὶ συνκρουσάντων καὶ τραυματίσαντες ἕνα αὐτῶν εἰς φυγὴν ὥρμησαν ὑφελομένων ἡμῶν γαῖσον, καὶ τῆι προκειμένηι ια ὀψίτερον τῆς ὥρας περιπεσόντες Πετοσίρει ἐπικαλουμένωι Δεκάρπωι
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSF — Article · nominative · singular · femininenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-NSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word ἀγέλη (agelē) means 'herd' or 'flock,' derived from the verb ἄγω (agō, to drive). It is used in the New Testament primarily to refer to groups of animals, particularly swine, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:30-32 and Mark 5:11-13. The term also has broader applications, referring to any company or group.
ἀγέλη, -ης, ἡ
(< ἄγω),
[in LXX chiefly for עֵ֫דֶר;]
a herd: Mt 8:30-32, Mk 5:11, 13, Lk 8:32, 33.†
ἀγέλη, -ης, ἡ, (ἄγω to drive), a herd: Mt. viii. 30 sqq.; Mk. ν. 11, 13; Lk. viii. 32 sq. (From Hom. down.)
ἀγέλη. The noun occurs twice in a farm account, P Lond 1171 (B.c. 8) (Ξ- ΠΙ. p. 177). For the adjective ἀγελαῖος, sce Sy/l 587°°° (iv/B.c.) κεραμίδες ayeAatat, with Dittenberger’s note. ayeveahoyntos. “© Nowhere found in prof. auth.,” says Grimm, nor are we able to supply the gap—which is not surprising! It is a good sample of a class of words which any author might coin for a special purpose. ayers. ᾿Αγενής, as opposed to εὐγενής, is well illustrated by P Oxy I. 33¥-° (late ii/A.p.) where, in a dramatic interview with the Emperor, in all probability M. Aurelius—though Wilcken (Chrest. I. p. 34f.) decides for Commodus—a certain Appianus, who had been condemned to death, appeals to his nobility (εὐγένεια) in such a way as to lead the Emperor to retort—@yjs οὖν ὅτι ἡμεῖς ἀγενεῖς ἐσμεν ; For the more general sense of ‘‘ mean,” ‘‘ base,” see the verso of the illiterate P Oxy I. 79% (not…
Read the full entry →ἀγέλη (agelē) — herd.
ἀγέλ-η, ἡ,
(ἄγω) herd, of horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+] always of oxen and kine, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—also, any herd or company, συῶν ἀ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; shoal of fish, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. in Crete and at Sparta, bands in which boys were trained, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
III. ={ἀστρικαὶ σφαῖραι} [Refs]
ἀγέλη
agele
from 71 (compare 32); a drove:--herd.
see GREEK for 71
see GREEK for 32
ἀγέλη, ης, ἡ
n.f.
a flock, herd
ἀγέλη agelē 7x
flock, herd
ἀγέλη ἄγω a herd, of horses, of oxen and kine, cf. βούνομος; of swine, Hes.
any herd or company, Soph., Eur.; metaph., πόνων ἀγέλαι id. Eur.
Noun-NSF — Noun · nominative · singular · femininenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-NSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
hurd.
See CATTLE.
Herd
Gen. 13:5; Deut. 7:14. (See CATTLE.)
(a collection of cattle), Herdsmen. The herd was greatly regarded in both the patriarchal and the Mosaic period. The ox was the most precious stock next to horse and mule. The herd yielded the most esteemed sacrifice, (Numbers 7:3; Psalms 69:31; Isaiah 66:3) also flesh meat, and milk, chiefly converted probably, into butter and cheese. (32:14; 2 Samuel 17:29) The agricultural and general usefulness of the ox in ploughing, threshing, and as a beast of burden, (1 Chronicles 12:40; Isaiah 46:1) made a slaughtering of him seem wasteful. Herdsmen, etc., in Egypt were a low, perhaps the lowest, caste; but of the abundance of cattle in Egypt, and of the care there bestowed on…
8 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 7 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
καὶ γὰρ εἰ τοῖς θρεμμάτων προεστηκόσιν ἀμφότερα ἐπιφημίζειν ἔθος κτηνοτρόφων καὶ ποιμένων ὀνόματα, ἀλλ’ οὔ γε τῷ τὴν ψυχῆς ἀγέλην ἐπιτετραμμένῳ λογισμῷ·
Μετὰ δʼ ἐκείνους οἵ τε ζηλωταὶ καὶ τῶν Ἰδουμαίων τὸ πλῆθος τὸν λαὸν ὥσπερ ἀνοσίων ζῴων ἀγέλην ἐπιόντες ἔσφαζον.
νομὰς ἐν μηνὶ Ἐπεὶφ … … καὶ ἐν μηνὶ Φαρμοῦθι α καὶ ἄρνες ἐν ἀγέλῃ θηλυκοὶ … καὶ ἀρσηνικοὶ α γίνονται ιζ γίνονται δραχμαὶ … η … λ
πρόβατα πδ αἶγες σὺν αὐτοῖς τῶι αὐτῶι αἶγες α καὶ ἐφθάρησαν Μεχεὶρ κγ ἐν ἀγέλῃ Πελάτιος εἶδεν Θατρῆς θυρωρός θηλ α Φαμενὼθ α ἐν Πισίριος εἶδεν Εὐτυχίδης θηλ α
κατά (kata) is a preposition used with the genitive and accusative cases, primarily meaning 'down' or 'against.' It indicates direction, motion, or relation, appearing in various contexts such as 'down from' (e.g., Mt 8:32) and 'against' (e.g., Mk 9:40). The word also conveys meanings like 'throughout' and 'according to.' Lexicons note its frequent use in the New Testament, with some variations in application.
κατά (bef. a vowel κατ’, καθ’; on the freq. neglect of elision, v. Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a),
prep. c. gen., acc.,
down, downwards.
C. gen. (WM, § 47, k; Bl., § 42, 2).
C. gen. rei, in local sense;
κατά, [on its neglect of elision before a vowel see Tf. Proleg. p. 95; cf. W. § 5, 1a.; B.10; WH. App. p. 1405], a preposition denoting motion or diffusion or direction from the higher to the lower; as in class. Grk., joined with the gen. and the acc. I. With the Genitive (W. § 47, k. p. 381 (357); [B. § 147, 20]); 1. prop. a. down from, down: κατὰ κατά 8 τοῦ κρημνοῦ, Mt. viii. 32; ΜΚ. v.13; Lk. viii. 33; κατέχεεν κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς (so that it flowed down from his head [οἷς W. 381 (357) note]; but it is more correct here to omit κατά with LT Tr WH; see καταχέω), Mk. xiv. 3; hence κατὰ κεφαλῆς (a veil hanging down from his head) ἔχων, 1 Co. xi. 4 ([Δ. V. having his head covered] cf. καταπέτασμα [or rather κάλυμμα (q. v.), but 566 ἔχω I. 1b.]). Ὁ. down upon (down into) anything: Acts xxvii. 14 [W. 381 (357) note!; ef. B.D. Am. ed. s. ν. Crete]; trop. 7 κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία reaching down…
Read the full entry →κατά, the favourite preposition of Polybius, by whom it is often used in place of ἐν, eis, and περί (Krebs Pra. p. 4), is also found with considerable variety of application in the NT, where it occurs 73 times c. gen., and 391 times c. acc. (cf. Proleg. p. 105). Brugmann (Awrze Vergletchende Grammazk, p. 479) considers that the earliest use of the word was “‘along ” something, so as to remain in connexion and contact with the object, and from this most of the senses found in the NT can be derived. I. (1) Turning to the construction c. gen. we find that the meaning ‘‘along” has passed into ‘‘down,” a usage not found in ΜΟΥ, in such passages as P Petr II. 18(26)!° (B.c. a ἐπιπεσὼν ἔτυπτεν [ad]t[o]v κατὰ τοῦ τραχήλου, Chest. τοῦ πνοήν: ἐξ Mt 8%, r Cor 114, 2 Cor 8%. (2) This in turn becomes ‘‘ against,” as in Mt τοῦδ, Mk 14°5, e.g. P Eleph 115 (B.c. 311-0) (= Se/ections, p. 4) ὅπου ἂν…
Read the full entry →κατά (kata) — according to.
κατά [κᾰτᾰ],
poetry καταί accusative to [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: preposition with genitive or accusative:— downwards.
__A WITH GEN.,
__A.I denoting motion from above, down from, βῆ δὲ κατ᾽ Οὐλύμποιο καρήνων, κατ᾽ Ἰδαίων ὀρέων, βαλέειν κ. πέτρης, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καθ᾽ ἵππων ἀΐξαντε[Refs 5th c.BC+] — for κατ᾽ ἄκρης see.{ἄκρα}: Μοῖσα κ. στόματος Χέε νέκταρ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]
__A.II denoting downward motion,
__A.II.1 down upon or over, κ. Χθονὸς ὄμματα πήξας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the dying, κατὰ.. ὀφθαλμῶν κέχυτ᾽ ἀχλύς a cloud settled upon the eyes, [Refs]; φᾶρος κὰκ κεφαλῆς εἴρυσσε down over.. , [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [κόπρος] κ. σπείους κέχυτο.. πολλή [Refs]; ὕδωρ κ. Χειρός, see at {Χεί; μύρον κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς καταχέαντες} [Refs…
κατά
kata
a primary particle; (prepositionally) down (in place or time), in
varied relations (according to the case (genitive, dative or
accusative) with which it is joined):--about, according as (to),
after, against, (when they were) X alone, among, and, X apart, (even,
like) as (concerning, pertaining to touching), X aside, at, before,
beyond, by, to the charge of, (charita-)bly, concerning, + covered,
(dai-)ly, down, every, (+ far more) exceeding, X more excellent, for,
from ... to, godly, in(-asmuch, divers, every, -to, respect of), ...
by, after the manner of, + by any means, beyond (out of) measure, X
mightily, more, X natural, of (up-)on (X part), out (of every), over
against, (+ your) X own, + particularly, so, through(-oughout,
-oughout every), thus, (un-)to(-gether, -ward), X uttermost,
where(-by), with. In composition it retains many of these
κατά
Prep.
down from, against, according to, throughout, during
κατά kata 473x
down from, Mt. 8:32; down upon, upon, Mk. 14:3; Acts 27:14; down into; κατὰ βάθους, profound, deepest, 2 Cor. 8:2; down over, throughout a space, Lk. 4:14; 23:5; concerning, in cases of pointed allegation, 1 Cor. 15:15; against, Mt. 12:30; by, in oaths, Mt. 26:63; with an acc. of place, in the quarter of, about, near, at, Lk. 10;32; Acts 2:10; throughout, Read the full entry →
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
480 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 48 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 473 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…
ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ μείζων ἦν ἡ τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου περιβολή, κατʼ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον χωρίσας ταῖς ἰδίαις ἀρχαῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ τέλει τὴν γραφὴν συνεμέτρησα·
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
ἐπρίατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πανοβχούνιος ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ
ἐπρίατο Πακοῖβις Πατοῦτος ὡς ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις
μελίχρως τετανὸς μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word κρημνός (lemma: kremnos) refers to a steep bank or precipice, derived from the verb meaning 'to hang down.' It appears in the New Testament in contexts describing steep places, specifically in Matthew, Mark, and Luke. The lexicons note its use in various ancient texts, indicating a range of meanings from cliffs to the edges of trenches.
κρημνός, -οῦ, ὁ
(< κρεμάννυμι),
[in LXX: II Ch 25:12 (סֶלַע)*;]
a steep bank: Mt 8:32, Mk 5:13, Lk 8:33.†
κρημνός, -ov, 6, (fr. κρεμάννυμι), a steep (place), a precipice: Mt. viii. 32; Mk. v.13; Lk. viii. 88. (2 Chr. xxv. 12; Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down.)
κρημνός. This word, which in the NT is confined to Mk ς13 and parallels, is found in an account of rushes used in irrigation works, P Petr ITI. 3011: 8, where mention is made of those employed—els τοὺς κρημνούς, for the steep banks or edges of the trench. See also the epitaph on one who had hurled himself from the cliffs, Aazbe/, 2251£— ᾿᾽Οστέα μὲν καὶ σάρκας ἐμὰς σπιλάδες διέχευαν ὀξεῖαι, κρημνῶν ἅλμα ὑποδεξάμεναι.
κρημνός (krēmnos) — cliff.
κρημνός, ὁ,
irregular
__Aplural κρημνά, τά, variant for{κρημνούς} in [Refs 4th c.AD+] Mynd.63:—overhanging bank, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] of the bank of a river, edge of a trench, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; later, beetling cliff, crag, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀναθεῖναι ἐπὶ κρημνόν τιν᾽ [Refs 5th c.BC+] down from the cliffs of Epipolae, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; οἱ K., the [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.2 in plural, edges of an ulcer, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.3 labia pudendi, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
κρημνός
kremnos
from 2910; overhanging, i.e. a precipice:--steep place.
see GREEK for 2910
κρημνός, οῦ, ὁ
n.m.
a crag, precipice
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 3 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
τὰ δὲ ζῷα πάντων τῶν συνεχόντων ἀφειμένα παρακινεῖται καὶ οἰστρᾷ καὶ οὐ παύεται φερόμενα, πρὶν ὑποσκελισθέντα πεσεῖν ἢ κατά τινος ἐνεχθέντα κρημνοῦ βαθέος παραπολέσθαι.
ἦν δὲ τὸ τῶν πολεμίων στρατόπεδον ἐπὶ κρημνοῦ, τρισὶν ἄκραις εἰς λεπτὸν ἀπηκονημέναις μῆκος πέτρας ἐν κύκλῳ περιστεφανούσης ὥσπερ προβόλοις τὰς ἐπιχειρήσεις ἀπομαχόμενον.
εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'
εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…
Read the full entry →εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…
Read the full entry →εἰς (eis) — toward.
ἐν εἰς
or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:
Read the full entry →εἰς
eis
a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or
entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);
also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,
(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more
exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,
+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the
intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at
one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the
end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often
used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs
(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).
εἰς
Prep.
into, in, among, till, for
εἰς
into, to c. acc.
PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:
OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.
with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·
ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς
καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν
ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
θάλασσα (thalassa) means 'the sea' and is often used in the New Testament to refer to various bodies of water, including the Mediterranean and the Red Sea. It can also denote an inland lake, such as the Sea of Galilee. The term appears in several verses, including Matthew 23:15 and Acts 7:36. Some sources note its connection to the idea of agitation, but interpretations vary.
THE connexion of θάλασσα with the verb ταράσσειν, that it means properly the agitated or disturbed, finds favour with 1 I cannot regard as an evidence of such reconsecration the wellknown words of Ignatius, Ad Rom. 7: ὃ ἐμὸς ἔρως ἐσταύρωται. It is far more consistent with the genius of these Ignatian Epistles to take épws subjectively here, ‘ My love of the world is crucified,’ .6. with Christ ; rather than objectively, ‘ Christ, the object of my love, is crucified.’ 2 Consult on ἔρως the noble fragment from Sophocles, preserved by Stobeeus : Νόσημ᾽ ἔρωτος τοῦτ᾽ ἐφίμερον κακόν. ἔχοιμ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸ μὴ κακῶς ἀπεικάσαι, ὅταν πάγου φανέντος αἰθρίου χεροῖν κρύσταλλον ἁρπάσωσι παῖδες ἀσταγῆ. τὰ πρῶτ᾽ ἔχουσιν ἡδονὰς ποταινίους, τέλος δ᾽ ὃ χυμὸς οὔθ᾽ ὅπως ἀφῇ θέλει οὔτ᾽ ἐν χεροῖν τὸ κτῆμα σύμφορον μένειν. οὕτω γε τοὺς ἐρῶντας αὑτὸς ἵμερος δρᾶν καὶ τὸ μὴ δρᾶν πολλάκις προΐεται. §xul1 SYNONYMS OF THE…
Read the full entry →θάλασσα, -ης, ἡ,
[in LXX chiefly for יָם;]
the sea: Mt 23:15, Mk 11:23, Lk 21:25, Ro 9:27, He 11:12, Ja 1:6, Ju 13, Re 7:1, al.; τὸ πέλαγος τῆς θ. (v. Tr., ut infr.), Mt 18:6; ὁ οὐρανὸς κ. ἡ γῆ κ. ἡ θ., of the whole world, Ac 4:24, al. (Hg 2:7); θ. ὑαλίνη, Re 4:6 15:2; of the Mediterranean, Ac…
Read the full entry →θάλασσα [cf. B. 7], -ns, 7, (akin to ads [better, allied to ταράσσω etc., from its tossing; ef. Vanitek, p. 303]; Sept. for D>), [fr. Hom. down], the sea; [on its distinetion from πέλαγος see the latter word]; a. univ.: Mt. xxiii. 15; Mk. xi. 23; Lk. xvii. 2,6; xxi. 25; Ro. ix. 27; 2Co. xi. 26; Heb. xi. 12;,Jas.i.6; Jude 13; Rev. Vil. 1-3, ete.; ἐργάζεσθαι τὴν θάλ. (see ἐργάζομαι, 2 a.), Rey. xviii. 17; τὸ πέλαγος τῆς Bad. (see πέλαγος, a.), Mt. xviii. 6; joined with γῆ and οὐρανός it forms a periphrasis for the whole world, Acts iv. 24; xiv. 15; Rev. v. 13; x. 6 [L WHbr.]; xiv. 7, (Hage. ii. 7; Ps. exlv. (exlvi.) 6; Joseph. antt. 4, 3, 2; [e. Ap. 2,10,1]); among the visions of the Apocalypse a glassy sea or sea of glass is spoken of; but what the writer symbolized by this is not quite clear: Rev. iv. 6; xv. 2. b. spec. used [even without the art., cf. W. 121 (115); Β. § 124, 8b.] of…
Read the full entry →θάλασσα. BGU II. 4237 (ii/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 90) εὐχαριστῶ | | from Cnidus, Sy// 8152, where a woman devotes to Demeter (cf. 2 Cor 1178) ἔσωσε, P Oxy VII. 1067*9 (iii/A.D.) ἀγόρασόν ᾿ τῷ κυρίῳ Σεράπιδι, ὅτι μου κινδυνεύσαντος εἰς θάλασσαν μοι ὀψαρίδιον ἐκ τῆς θαλάσσης (cf. Jn 2119), and from the inserr. Michel 372" (ii/B.c.) ἐργα[ζ]όμενός τε κατὰ θάλασσαν ἐργασίαν, 7. 52119 (ii/B.c.) κατὰ γῆς καὶ κατὰ θαλάσσας. For references to ἣ ἐρυθρὰ θάλασσα, as in Ac γ35, Heb 117%, cf. P Grenf I. 9% (iii/B.c.) ἐρ]υθρᾶι θαλάσσηι, OG/S 186° (B.C. 62) ὁ συγγενὴς καὶ ἐπιστράτηγος Kal στρατηγὸς τῆς ᾿Ινδικῆς καὶ ᾿Εἰρυθρᾶς θαλάσσης, 16. 190" (B.c. 51) ἐπὶ τῆς ᾿Ινδικῆς καὶ ᾿Εἰρυθρᾶς θαλάσσης : cf. also the intr. to P Ryl 11. 66 (late ii/p.c.). For the adj. θαλάττί--σσ-)ιος, see P Oxy I. 877 (A.D. 342) θαλαττίου ναυκληρίου, ‘a seagoing vessel,” 26. X. 1288® (iv/a.D.) eis διαγραφὴν πλύου θαλασσίας…
Read the full entry →θάλασσα (thalassa) — sea.
θάλασσα [θᾰ],
Attic dialectθᾰλᾰμ-ττα [Refs] (but θάλασσα 22.236 [Refs 4th c.BC+], ἡ: —sea, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently of the Mediterranean sea, ἥδε ἡ θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ παρ᾽ ἡμῖν θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ἐντὸς καὶ κ. ἡ. λεγομένη θ. [Refs 1st c.BC+]; ἡ ἔσω θ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἡ ἔξω θ., of the Ocean, [Refs]; ἡ Ἀτλαντικὴ θ. [Refs]; ἡ μεγάλη θ. [Refs 1st c.AD+]; of a salt lake, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ θάλασσαν by sea, opposed to πεζῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to κατὰ γῆς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατά τε γῆν καὶ κατὰ θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς θ. ἀνθεκτέα ἐστί one must engage in maritime affairs, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ περὶ τὴν θ. sea-faring men, [Refs 4th c.BC+] a sea of troubles, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ Κρὴς τὴν θ. (i.e. ἀγνοεῖ), of pretended ignorance…
Read the full entry →θάλασσα
thalassa
probably prolonged from 251; the sea (genitive case or
specially):--sea.
see GREEK for 251
θάλασσα, ης, ἡ
n.f.
the sea, lake
θάλασσα the sea, Hom., etc.; when he uses it of a particular sea, he means the Mediterranean, opp. to Ὠκεανός; — Hdt. calls the Mediterranean ἥδε ἡ θάλασσα; so, ἡ παρ᾽ ἡμῖν θάλ. Plat.; κατὰ θάλασσαν by sea, opp. to πεζῇ by land, Hdt.; to κατὰ γῆς, Thuc.:—metaph., κακῶν θ. a sea of troubles, Aesch.
a well of salt water, said to be produced by a stroke of Poseidon's trident, in the Acropolis at Athens, Hdt.
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
se (yam; thalassa; in Ac 27:5 pelagos): The Mediterranean is called ha-yam ha-gadhol, "the great sea" (Nu 34:6; Jos 1:4; Eze 47:10, etc.); ha-yam ha-'acharon, "the hinder," or "western sea" (De 11:24; 34:2; Joe 2:20; Zec 14:8); yam pelishtim, "the sea of the Philis" (Ex 23:31); the King James Version translates yam yapho' in Ezr 3:7 by "sea of Joppa," perhaps rightly.
The sea, yam , is used in Scripture to denote-- "The gathering of the waters," "the Ocean." (Genesis 1:2,10; 30:13) etc. Some portion of this, as the Mediterranean Sea, called the "hinder," the "western" and the "utmost" sea, (11:24; 34:2; Joel 2:20) "sea of the Philistines," (Exodus 23:31) "the great sea," (Numbers 36:6,7; Joshua 15:47) "the sea." Genesis49:13; Psal 80:11 Also frequently of the Red Sea. (Exodus 15:4) [RED SEA SEA] Inland lakes termed seas, as the Salt or Dead Sea. [See the special article] Any…
The Hebrews give the name of sea to any large collection of water, Job 14:11; as to the lakes of Tiberias and Asphaltites, and also to the rivers Nile and Euphrates, Isa 11:15 18:2 21:1 Jer 51:36,42. The principal seas mentioned in Scripture are the following:
1. The GREAT SEA, the Mediterranean, called also the Hinder or Western Sea. Indeed, the Hebrew word for sea, meaning the Mediterranean, is often put for the west. The Great Sea is 2,200 miles long, and in the widest part 1,200 miles in width. In many places it is so deep as to give no soundings. It is little affected by tides, but is often agitated by violent winds. The prevailing direction of the wind in spring is from the southeast and southwest and from the northeast…
→ Creation of Ge 1:9,10; Ps 95:5; 148:4,5
→ Lake Galilee calmed by Jesus Mt 8:24-26; Mr 4:37-39
→ Jesus walked upon Lake Galilee Mt 14:25-31
90 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 91 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 224 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
οὐ γὰρ ἀναπτῆναι, φησίν, εἰς οὐρανὸν οὐδὲ πέραν θαλάσσης ἀφικέσθαι δεῖ κατὰ ζήτησιν τοῦ καλοῦ·
τῇ δὲ τρίτῃ ἵστησι τὴν γῆν ἀναχέας περὶ αὐτὴν τὴν θάλασσαν·
ὁμοίως περὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ λέγει Δανιήλ: Καὶ εἶδον τὸ τέταρτον θηρίον τὸ πονηρὸν καὶ ἰσχυρὸν καὶ χαλεπώτερον παρὰ πάντα τὰ θηρία τῆς θαλάσσης, καὶ ὡς ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἀνέτειλεν δέκα κέρατα, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν μικρὸν κέρας παραφυάδιον, καὶ ὡς ἐταπείνωσεν ὑφ̓ ἓν τρία…
σηδυω … … … αμβα. … … ηρου … ε … ω θαλασσα … α … … … ἠλλαχέναι σοι
ἐν Μυὸς Ὅρμωι τῶι πρὸς τῇ ἐρυθρᾷ θαλάσσῃ ἔτους δωδεκάτου Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Δομιτιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Φαμενὼθ ἐνάτῃ καὶ εἰκάδι Ἀμμώνιος Εὐδαίμονος Πέρσης
θυγατρὸς αὐτῆς καὶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ μου. εὐχαριστῶ τῷ κυρίῳ Σεράπιδι ὅτι μου κινδυνεύσαντος εἰς θάλασσαν ἔσωσε εὐθέως. ὅτε εἰσῆλθον εἰς Μησήνους, ἔλαβα βιάτικον παρὰ Καίσαρος χρυσοῦς τρεῖς καὶ καλῶς
εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.
εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…
Read the full entry →εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…
Read the full entry →εἰμί (eimi) — to be.
εἰμί
(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…
Read the full entry →εἰμί
eimi
the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a
primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,
have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,
2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.
see GREEK for 1488
see GREEK for 1498
see GREEK for 1511
see GREEK for 1527
see GREEK for 2258
see GREEK for 2071
see GREEK for 2070
see GREEK for 2075
see GREEK for 2076
see GREEK for 2771
see GREEK for 2468
see GREEK for 5600
εἰμί
v.
I am, exist
εἰμί eimi 2x
to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6
εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.
of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.
Read the full entry →Verb-IAI-3P — Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · pluralimperfect active indicative — a continuing action in past time.
V-IAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural
2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο
Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο
δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.
δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),
post-positive conjunctive particle;
copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →
δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…
Read the full entry →δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…
Read the full entry →δέ (de) — then.
δέ,
but: adversative and copulative Particle,
I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. without preceding μέν,
II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. copulative,
II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…
δέ
de
a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,
etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).
δέ
Cj.
but, on the other hand, and
δέ de 2x
a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6
δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.
δέ is often redundant,
to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.
to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.
POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
The Greek word ὡς is an adverb and conjunction derived from the relative pronoun ὅς. It is used in various contexts to mean 'as,' 'like,' or 'when,' and can indicate manner, comparison, or time. In the New Testament, it appears frequently to express similarity or to introduce clauses, such as in comparisons or temporal phrases. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its usage.
ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.
As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as;
with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mk 4:26, I Co 3:15, Eph 5:28, Ja 2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Ac 8:32, I Co 7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), c. nom., Mt 6:29, al.; c. acc., Mt 19:19, Mk 12:31, al.; c. prep., Mt 26:55, Read the full entry →
ὡς [ Treg. (by mistake) in Mt. xxiv. 38 ὥς; cf. W. 462 (431); Chandler § 934, and reff. in Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. p. 494
ὡς. Ι. = “45: P Goodsp Cairo 44 (ii/B.c.) (= Selections, Ῥ- 24) εἰ tppwoar . .. εἴη dv ὡς αἱρούμεθα, “if you are well, it will be as we desire,” BGU I. 1637 (A.D. 108) καὶ yap ἄλλοι ὡς πληγέντες ὑπὸ αὐτοῦ ἀναφόριον δεδώκασι, “for others have given information (from time to time) ἃ5 having been assaulted by him,” P Flor I. 5618 (A.p. 234) ὡς καθήκει, and BGU IV. το. 1 (iv/y A.D.) κα]ταβληθῆναι ὡς φονέα. 2. = “that,” ‘ how,” after verbs of saying, thinking, etc.: P Tebt I. τοῦ (B.c. 119) φρόντισον ὡς τὰ τῆς ὑποσχέσεως ἐκπληρωθήσεται, “take care that the terms of his agreement are fulfilled” (Edd.), and P Tebt II. 4101? (i/A.D.) μν[ἤ]σθητι o[s] ἐν τῷ Τρ[ιστόμῳ pe ἐφιλοτ[ιυἹμοῦ σὺν ἐμοὶ μεῖναι, ‘remember how zealous you were at Tristomos to remain with me” (Fdd.). 3. Ὁ. ind. with dy, as in Σ Cor 125, cf. P Par 4615 (B.C. 152) ὡς ἂν εὐκαιρήσω, παραχρῆμα παρέσομαι πρός σε. 4. c. conj. with…
Read the full entry →ὡς (hōs) — as/when.
ὡς:—
Summary:
__A as adverb of Manner.
__A.Aa ὧς and ὥς (with accent), so, thus.
__A.Ab ὡς (without accent) of the Relat. pronoun ὅς, as.
__A.Ac ὡς Relat. and Interrog., how.
__A.Ad ὡς temporal, when.
__A.Ae ὡς Local, where,
__B ὡς, as CONJUNCTION.
__C,D various usages. adverb of Manner:
__A.Aa ὥς, Demonstr., ={οὕτως}, so, thus, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Ionic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὥς simply ={οὕτως}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.2 καὶ ὧς even so, nevertheless, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐδ᾽ ὧς not even so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] are used in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἂν ὧς, εἴπερ μέλει σοι, ἀπόστειλόν μοί τινα [Refs 4th c.AD+]; δουλεύων καθὼς καὶ ὧς [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; Thess. καὶ οὗς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; for this phrase the accentuation ὧς[Refs 2nd…
ὡς
hos
probably adverb of comparative from 3739; which how, i.e. in that
manner (very variously used, as follows):--about, after (that),
(according) as (it had been, it were), as soon (as), even as (like),
for, how (greatly), like (as, unto), since, so (that), that, to wit,
unto, when(-soever), while, X with all speed.
see GREEK for 3739
ὡς
Adv
as, like as, how, while, so that
ὡς hōs 504x
conjunction formed from the relative pronoun ὅς, used as a comparative part. and conj., as, correlatively, Mk. 4:26; Jn. 7:46; Rom. 5:15; as, like as, Mt. 10:16; Eph. 5:8; according as, Gal. 6:10; as, as it were, Rev. 8:8; as, Lk. 16:1; Acts 3:12; before numerals, about, Mk. 5:13; conj. that, Read the full entry →
ὡς thus, as, so that, since
A. ADVERB of Manner, either ὥς (with accent) Demonstr. so, thus, Lat. sic;— or ὡς (without accent) Relat. as, Lat. ut. B. ὡς, as CONJUNCTION. C, D. various usages.
of Manner:
ὥς, Demonstr. = οὕτως, so, thus, Lat. sic, Hom., Hdt.; rare in attic:— καὶ ὥς, even so, nevertheless, οὐδ᾽ ὥς, μηδ᾽ ὥς, not even so, in no wise, Hom., Soph.
in Comparisons, ὥς . . , ὡς . . , so . . as . . , Lat. sic . . ut . . , Il., Plat.
thus, for instance, Od.
ὡς, Relat., as, Lat. ut, first in Hom.; οὕτως ὡς, Lat. sic ut; but the antec. is often omitted: similes are commonly introduced by ὡς ὅτε, ὡς δ᾽ ὅτε, where ὅτε often seems superfluous, ἤριπε δ᾽, ὡς ὅτε πύργος [ἤριπε] Il.:—this ὡς takes the accent at the end of a clause or when it follows the word dependent on it; θεὸς δ᾽ ὣς τίετο δήμῳ Il.; οἱ δὲ φέβοντο, βόες ὥς…
Adv — Adverbadverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined
a-bout': The use of this word as a preposition, in the sense of "around," is confined to the Old Testament. In the New Testament, generally an adverb, for Greek hos or "hosei." The Revised Version (British and American) adopts it in several idiomatic translations of mello, referring to what is about to be, i.e. on the point of occurring, or immediately impending, amending the King James Version, in Ac 5:35; 27:2; Re 12:4, etc.
516 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 22 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 502 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
The Greek word δισχίλιοι (i.e., *dischilioi*) means 'two thousand.' It is formed from the components for 'two' and 'thousand.' This term appears in the New Testament in Mark 5:13, where it refers to a quantity of pigs. The entries consistently affirm its meaning without significant disagreement.
δισ-χίλιοι, -αι, -α
two thousand: Mk 5:13.†
δισχίλιοι (dischilioi) — two thousand.
δισχίλιοι [χῑ], αι, α,
Aeolic dialect δισχέλιοι [Refs 7th c.BC+]:— two thousand, [Refs 5th c.BC+]“Criti,” 118a, etc.: poetry dative plural, δισχίλοις ἀνδραπόδοισιν [Refs]: singular, δισχίλιος, α, ον, with collective Nouns, e. g. ἵππος [Refs 5th c.BC+]
δισχίλιοι
dischilioi
from 1364 and 5507; two thousand:--two thousand.
see GREEK for 1364
see GREEK for 5507
δισχίλιοι, αι, α
Adj
two thousand
δισχίλιοι dischilioi 1x
two thousand, Mk. 5:13*
δισχίλιοι adjdi_s-xili os_h_on two thousand, Hdt.:—sg. with collective nouns, δισχιλίη ἵππος 2000 horse, id. Hdt.
Adj-NPM — Adjective · nominative · plural · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
A-NPM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
thou'-zand ('eleph; chilioi).
See NUMBER.
1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Counted over the 11 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τὰ δὲ περὶ τὴν σκηνὴν πρῶτοι μὲν οἱ ἱερεῖς κατεῖχον, ἔπειτα δὲ οἱ Λευῖται πάντες ὄντες τὸ πλῆθος, ἐξητάσθησαν γὰρ καὶ αὐτοὶ τοῦ μὲν ἄρρενος ὅσον τριακοστὴν εἶχεν ἡμέραν γενόμενον, δισμύριοι καὶ δισχίλιοι πρὸς τοῖς ὀκτακοσίοις ὀγδοήκοντα.
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word πνίγω (i.e., *pnigō*) means to choke, strangle, or throttle, and can also refer to drowning. It is used in various contexts, including metaphorical senses like vexing or tormenting. The New Testament references include Matthew 13:7 and Mark 5:13, where it describes choking by thorns and drowning, respectively. Some entries note its use in cooking, but the primary focus remains on suffocation and strangulation.
πνίγω,
[in LXX: I Ki 16:14, 15 (בּעת pi.)*;]
to choke: c. acc., Mt 13:7 (WH, mg.); impf. (conative), Mt 18:28; of drowning, pass., Mk 5:13 (cf. ἀπο-, ἐπι-, συν-πνίγω).†
πνίγω: : impf. ἔπνιγον ; 1 aor. ἔπνιξα ; impf. pass. 3 pers. plur. ἐπνίγοντο ; a. tochoke, strangle: used of thorns crowd.ny down the seed sown in a field and hindering its crowth, Mt. xiii. 7 T WH mrg.; in the pass. of perishing by drowning (Xen. anab. 5, 7, 25; cf. Joseph. antt. 10, 7,5), Mk. v. 13. b. to wring one’s neck, throtile, ΓΑ. V. to take one by the throat]: Mt. xviii. 28. [Comp.: > > ᾿ ΕΣ dro-, ἐπι-, συμ- πνίγω.]
πνίγω. The nursery acrostic P Teht II. 2784 (i/A.p.) πνίξωι ἐματόν, ῥιγῶι yap, “1 will choke myself, for it is cold” (Edd.), gives us the word in an elementary stage of educational achievement. Cf. Artem. p. 318 ἢ épetv ἢ πνίγεσθαι. The subst. πνιγμός occurs in a Menander fragment published in PSI II. 126° ἢ :-— τί παθών; χολή, λύπη Tis, ἔκστασις φρενῶν, πνιγμός. 6 , 22 ποιέω
πνίγω (pnigō) — to choke.
πνίγ-ω [ῑ],
[Refs 5th c.BC+]: imperfect ἔπνῑγον [Refs 5th c.BC+]future πνίξω (ἀπο-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Doric dialect 2nd pers. plural future πνιξεῖσθε [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ἔπνιξα, imperative πνῖξον, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, future πνῐγήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ἐπνίχθην (ἀπ-) [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; but ἐπνίγην [ῐ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]perfect πέπνιγμαι, see #11.—The simple verb is less frequently than the compound ἀποπνίγω:— choke, throttle, strangle, Sophr.[same place], etc.; of a doctor, πνίγων.. πικρότατα πόματα διδούς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἂν ὕλη πνίγῃ [τὸν σῖτον] [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, to be choked, stifled, ἐπνιγόμην τὰ σπλάγχνα [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Read the full entry →πνίγω
pnigo
strengthened from 4154; to wheeze, i.e. (causative, by implication) to
throttle or strangle (drown):--choke, take by the throat.
see GREEK for 4154
πνίγω
v.
I choke, strangle
πνίγω to choke, throttle, strangle, Plat.; proverb., ὅταν τὸ ὕδωρ πνίγηι, τί δεῖ ἐπιπίνειν; if water chokes, why should one drink more? Arist.:—Pass. to be choked, stifled, Ar.: to be drowned, Xen.
metaph. to vex, torment, Luc.
to cook in a close-covered vessel, to stew, Hdt., Ar.
Verb-IPI-3P — Verb · imperfect · passive · indicative · third person · pluralimperfect passive indicative — a continuing action in past time.
V-IPI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Passive Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural
3 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.
ἐν,
prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).
Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…
Read the full entry →ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…
Read the full entry →ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…
Read the full entry →ἐν (en) — in/on/among.
ἐν,
poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]
__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.
__A WITH DAT.
__A.I OF PLACE,
__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…
ἐν
en
a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or
state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or
constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519
and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +
almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+
all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,
-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,
one, X quickly,
X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),
through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,
with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same
import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate
direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)
preposition.
see GREEK for 1519
see GREEK for 1537
ἐν
Prep.
in, on, among
ἐν en 2x
followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of,
ἐν
e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.
Lat. in.
PREP. WITH DAT.:
OF PLACE
in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.
in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.
in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.
in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.
in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…
2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-DSF — Article · dative · singular · femininedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-DSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
θάλασσα (thalassa) means 'the sea' and is often used in the New Testament to refer to various bodies of water, including the Mediterranean and the Red Sea. It can also denote an inland lake, such as the Sea of Galilee. The term appears in several verses, including Matthew 23:15 and Acts 7:36. Some sources note its connection to the idea of agitation, but interpretations vary.
THE connexion of θάλασσα with the verb ταράσσειν, that it means properly the agitated or disturbed, finds favour with 1 I cannot regard as an evidence of such reconsecration the wellknown words of Ignatius, Ad Rom. 7: ὃ ἐμὸς ἔρως ἐσταύρωται. It is far more consistent with the genius of these Ignatian Epistles to take épws subjectively here, ‘ My love of the world is crucified,’ .6. with Christ ; rather than objectively, ‘ Christ, the object of my love, is crucified.’ 2 Consult on ἔρως the noble fragment from Sophocles, preserved by Stobeeus : Νόσημ᾽ ἔρωτος τοῦτ᾽ ἐφίμερον κακόν. ἔχοιμ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸ μὴ κακῶς ἀπεικάσαι, ὅταν πάγου φανέντος αἰθρίου χεροῖν κρύσταλλον ἁρπάσωσι παῖδες ἀσταγῆ. τὰ πρῶτ᾽ ἔχουσιν ἡδονὰς ποταινίους, τέλος δ᾽ ὃ χυμὸς οὔθ᾽ ὅπως ἀφῇ θέλει οὔτ᾽ ἐν χεροῖν τὸ κτῆμα σύμφορον μένειν. οὕτω γε τοὺς ἐρῶντας αὑτὸς ἵμερος δρᾶν καὶ τὸ μὴ δρᾶν πολλάκις προΐεται. §xul1 SYNONYMS OF THE…
Read the full entry →θάλασσα, -ης, ἡ,
[in LXX chiefly for יָם;]
the sea: Mt 23:15, Mk 11:23, Lk 21:25, Ro 9:27, He 11:12, Ja 1:6, Ju 13, Re 7:1, al.; τὸ πέλαγος τῆς θ. (v. Tr., ut infr.), Mt 18:6; ὁ οὐρανὸς κ. ἡ γῆ κ. ἡ θ., of the whole world, Ac 4:24, al. (Hg 2:7); θ. ὑαλίνη, Re 4:6 15:2; of the Mediterranean, Ac…
Read the full entry →θάλασσα [cf. B. 7], -ns, 7, (akin to ads [better, allied to ταράσσω etc., from its tossing; ef. Vanitek, p. 303]; Sept. for D>), [fr. Hom. down], the sea; [on its distinetion from πέλαγος see the latter word]; a. univ.: Mt. xxiii. 15; Mk. xi. 23; Lk. xvii. 2,6; xxi. 25; Ro. ix. 27; 2Co. xi. 26; Heb. xi. 12;,Jas.i.6; Jude 13; Rev. Vil. 1-3, ete.; ἐργάζεσθαι τὴν θάλ. (see ἐργάζομαι, 2 a.), Rey. xviii. 17; τὸ πέλαγος τῆς Bad. (see πέλαγος, a.), Mt. xviii. 6; joined with γῆ and οὐρανός it forms a periphrasis for the whole world, Acts iv. 24; xiv. 15; Rev. v. 13; x. 6 [L WHbr.]; xiv. 7, (Hage. ii. 7; Ps. exlv. (exlvi.) 6; Joseph. antt. 4, 3, 2; [e. Ap. 2,10,1]); among the visions of the Apocalypse a glassy sea or sea of glass is spoken of; but what the writer symbolized by this is not quite clear: Rev. iv. 6; xv. 2. b. spec. used [even without the art., cf. W. 121 (115); Β. § 124, 8b.] of…
Read the full entry →θάλασσα. BGU II. 4237 (ii/a.D.) (= Selections, p. 90) εὐχαριστῶ | | from Cnidus, Sy// 8152, where a woman devotes to Demeter (cf. 2 Cor 1178) ἔσωσε, P Oxy VII. 1067*9 (iii/A.D.) ἀγόρασόν ᾿ τῷ κυρίῳ Σεράπιδι, ὅτι μου κινδυνεύσαντος εἰς θάλασσαν μοι ὀψαρίδιον ἐκ τῆς θαλάσσης (cf. Jn 2119), and from the inserr. Michel 372" (ii/B.c.) ἐργα[ζ]όμενός τε κατὰ θάλασσαν ἐργασίαν, 7. 52119 (ii/B.c.) κατὰ γῆς καὶ κατὰ θαλάσσας. For references to ἣ ἐρυθρὰ θάλασσα, as in Ac γ35, Heb 117%, cf. P Grenf I. 9% (iii/B.c.) ἐρ]υθρᾶι θαλάσσηι, OG/S 186° (B.C. 62) ὁ συγγενὴς καὶ ἐπιστράτηγος Kal στρατηγὸς τῆς ᾿Ινδικῆς καὶ ᾿Εἰρυθρᾶς θαλάσσης, 16. 190" (B.c. 51) ἐπὶ τῆς ᾿Ινδικῆς καὶ ᾿Εἰρυθρᾶς θαλάσσης : cf. also the intr. to P Ryl 11. 66 (late ii/p.c.). For the adj. θαλάττί--σσ-)ιος, see P Oxy I. 877 (A.D. 342) θαλαττίου ναυκληρίου, ‘a seagoing vessel,” 26. X. 1288® (iv/a.D.) eis διαγραφὴν πλύου θαλασσίας…
Read the full entry →θάλασσα (thalassa) — sea.
θάλασσα [θᾰ],
Attic dialectθᾰλᾰμ-ττα [Refs] (but θάλασσα 22.236 [Refs 4th c.BC+], ἡ: —sea, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently of the Mediterranean sea, ἥδε ἡ θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ παρ᾽ ἡμῖν θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ἐντὸς καὶ κ. ἡ. λεγομένη θ. [Refs 1st c.BC+]; ἡ ἔσω θ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἡ ἔξω θ., of the Ocean, [Refs]; ἡ Ἀτλαντικὴ θ. [Refs]; ἡ μεγάλη θ. [Refs 1st c.AD+]; of a salt lake, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ θάλασσαν by sea, opposed to πεζῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to κατὰ γῆς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατά τε γῆν καὶ κατὰ θ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς θ. ἀνθεκτέα ἐστί one must engage in maritime affairs, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ περὶ τὴν θ. sea-faring men, [Refs 4th c.BC+] a sea of troubles, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ Κρὴς τὴν θ. (i.e. ἀγνοεῖ), of pretended ignorance…
Read the full entry →θάλασσα
thalassa
probably prolonged from 251; the sea (genitive case or
specially):--sea.
see GREEK for 251
θάλασσα, ης, ἡ
n.f.
the sea, lake
θάλασσα the sea, Hom., etc.; when he uses it of a particular sea, he means the Mediterranean, opp. to Ὠκεανός; — Hdt. calls the Mediterranean ἥδε ἡ θάλασσα; so, ἡ παρ᾽ ἡμῖν θάλ. Plat.; κατὰ θάλασσαν by sea, opp. to πεζῇ by land, Hdt.; to κατὰ γῆς, Thuc.:—metaph., κακῶν θ. a sea of troubles, Aesch.
a well of salt water, said to be produced by a stroke of Poseidon's trident, in the Acropolis at Athens, Hdt.
Noun-DSF — Noun · dative · singular · femininedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-DSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
se (yam; thalassa; in Ac 27:5 pelagos): The Mediterranean is called ha-yam ha-gadhol, "the great sea" (Nu 34:6; Jos 1:4; Eze 47:10, etc.); ha-yam ha-'acharon, "the hinder," or "western sea" (De 11:24; 34:2; Joe 2:20; Zec 14:8); yam pelishtim, "the sea of the Philis" (Ex 23:31); the King James Version translates yam yapho' in Ezr 3:7 by "sea of Joppa," perhaps rightly.
The sea, yam , is used in Scripture to denote-- "The gathering of the waters," "the Ocean." (Genesis 1:2,10; 30:13) etc. Some portion of this, as the Mediterranean Sea, called the "hinder," the "western" and the "utmost" sea, (11:24; 34:2; Joel 2:20) "sea of the Philistines," (Exodus 23:31) "the great sea," (Numbers 36:6,7; Joshua 15:47) "the sea." Genesis49:13; Psal 80:11 Also frequently of the Red Sea. (Exodus 15:4) [RED SEA SEA] Inland lakes termed seas, as the Salt or Dead Sea. [See the special article] Any…
The Hebrews give the name of sea to any large collection of water, Job 14:11; as to the lakes of Tiberias and Asphaltites, and also to the rivers Nile and Euphrates, Isa 11:15 18:2 21:1 Jer 51:36,42. The principal seas mentioned in Scripture are the following:
1. The GREAT SEA, the Mediterranean, called also the Hinder or Western Sea. Indeed, the Hebrew word for sea, meaning the Mediterranean, is often put for the west. The Great Sea is 2,200 miles long, and in the widest part 1,200 miles in width. In many places it is so deep as to give no soundings. It is little affected by tides, but is often agitated by violent winds. The prevailing direction of the wind in spring is from the southeast and southwest and from the northeast…
→ Creation of Ge 1:9,10; Ps 95:5; 148:4,5
→ Lake Galilee calmed by Jesus Mt 8:24-26; Mr 4:37-39
→ Jesus walked upon Lake Galilee Mt 14:25-31
90 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 91 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 224 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
οὐ γὰρ ἀναπτῆναι, φησίν, εἰς οὐρανὸν οὐδὲ πέραν θαλάσσης ἀφικέσθαι δεῖ κατὰ ζήτησιν τοῦ καλοῦ·
τῇ δὲ τρίτῃ ἵστησι τὴν γῆν ἀναχέας περὶ αὐτὴν τὴν θάλασσαν·
ὁμοίως περὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ λέγει Δανιήλ: Καὶ εἶδον τὸ τέταρτον θηρίον τὸ πονηρὸν καὶ ἰσχυρὸν καὶ χαλεπώτερον παρὰ πάντα τὰ θηρία τῆς θαλάσσης, καὶ ὡς ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἀνέτειλεν δέκα κέρατα, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν μικρὸν κέρας παραφυάδιον, καὶ ὡς ἐταπείνωσεν ὑφ̓ ἓν τρία…
σηδυω … … … αμβα. … … ηρου … ε … ω θαλασσα … α … … … ἠλλαχέναι σοι
ἐν Μυὸς Ὅρμωι τῶι πρὸς τῇ ἐρυθρᾷ θαλάσσῃ ἔτους δωδεκάτου Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Δομιτιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Φαμενὼθ ἐνάτῃ καὶ εἰκάδι Ἀμμώνιος Εὐδαίμονος Πέρσης
θυγατρὸς αὐτῆς καὶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ μου. εὐχαριστῶ τῷ κυρίῳ Σεράπιδι ὅτι μου κινδυνεύσαντος εἰς θάλασσαν ἔσωσε εὐθέως. ὅτε εἰσῆλθον εἰς Μησήνους, ἔλαβα βιάτικον παρὰ Καίσαρος χρυσοῦς τρεῖς καὶ καλῶς